Você está na página 1de 416

- la-

I
24-hour
1
Wearin!. safety belt correctly is one of the most important

-2- .. .$ 3 Q $ :' .
f' ri'
ri, ,.e
q _.I'
~ I ..<. v I T 0 set the clock on systems without Automatic Tone Control, press 9
I, a r e s and hold the SEEK right arrow until the correcg
Supplement to the1998 Chevrolet Blazer,GMC Jimmy and
Oldsmobile Bravada Owner’s Manuals

This information replaces the Heated Front Seats text in Press the lower partof the switch to turn the heater on
the “Seats and Restraint Systems” section of your low. Press the upper partof the switch to turn the heater
owner’s manual. on high. Put theswitch in the center position to turn the
heater off.
Heated Front Seats(If Equipped)
The passenger’s safety beltmusI oe engaged for the
. ,
If you have this feature, the heated seat feature to work on the passenger’s seat.
control is located on the
side of the seat. This feature
will quickly heat the lower
cushion and lower backof
the driver and front
passenger seats for
added comfort.

STFFO4-01
NOTES

2
Supplement to the1998 Chevrolet SlO (with ZR2 Suspension) and
Chevrolet Blazer (withZR2 Suspension) Owner’s Manuals
This information should be included with the “Daytime This information should be included with the “Engine
Running Lamps ( D m ) ” information located in Compartment Fuse Block” information located in
Section 2 in your owner’s manual. Section 6 in your owner’s manual.
Vehicles built for the U.S. domestic market are not DRL Not used for Daytime Running Lamps in
equipped with Daytime Running Lamps (DRL). vehicles built for the U.S. domestic market.

“Copyxight General Motors Corporation 1998


Part Number 15040820 All Rights Reserved
1
. ',
. . .

..... .,--. .. .
.L

. * ..,
. .. ..
.... ,.,

_. - .
- .: ,

....

2
Tk:: 1998 Chevrolet Blazer Owner’s Manual

1-1 Seats and Restraint Systems


This section tellsyou how to use your seats and safety belts properly.It also explains the“SIR’ system.
2- 1 Features and Controls
This section explains howto start and operate your vehicle.
3-1 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
This section tellsyou how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how
to operate your audio system.
4- l Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find helpful information and tips about the road how
and to drive under different conditions.
5-1 Problems on the Road
This section tells whatto do if you have a problem while driving, suchas a flat tire or overheated engine,etc.
6-1 Service and Appearance
Care
Here the manual tellsyou how to keep your vehicle running properly and looking good.
7-1 Maintenance Schedule
This section tellsyou when to perform vehicle maintenance and what fluids and lubricants to use.
8- 1 Customer Assistance Information
This section tells you howto contact Chevrolet for assistance and
how to get service and owner publications.
It also gives you information on “Reporting Safety Defects” on page
8-10.
9- 1 Index
Here’s an alphabeticallisting of almost every subject in this manual.
You can use it to quickly find
something you want to read.

i
We support voluntary

3CHEVROLET

GENERAL MOTORS, GM,the GM Emblem,


L..JCERTIFIED

WE SUPPORT
technician certification.

VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem and the CERTIFICATION THROUGH
name BLAZER areregistered trademarks of General National institute for
Motors Corporation. AUTOMOTIVE
SERVICE
EXCELLENCE
This manual includesthe latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes in the
product after that time without further notice. For
vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name For Canadian OwnersWho Prefer a
“General Motorsof Canada Limited” for Chevrolet
Motor Division whenever itappears in this manual. French Language Manual:
Please keep this manual in your vehicle,so it will be
Aux propribtaires canadiens:Vous pouvez vous
procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en frangais chez
there if you ever need it when you’re onthe road. If you
votre concessionaire ou au:
sell the vehicle, please leavethis manual in it so the new
owner can useit. DGN MarketingServices Ltd.
1577 Meyerside Dr.
Mississauqa, Ontario L5T 1B9

Litho in U.S.A. @CopyrightGeneral Motors Corporation 1997


C98 11 B First Edition All Rights Reserved

ii
About DrivingYour Vehicle Safety Warnings and Symbols
As with other vehicles of this type, failure tooperate You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.
this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or We use a box and the word CAUTIONto tell you
an accident. Be sure to read the “on-pavement” and about things that could hurt you if you wereto ignore
“off-road” driving guidelines in this manual. (See the warning.
“Driving Guidelines” and “Off-Road Driving with
Your Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle” in theIndex.)

How to Use this Manual


Many people read their owner’s manualfrom beginning The!!anthereissomethingthatcouldhurt
to end when theyfirst receive their new vehicle. If you you or other people.
do this, it will help you learn about the features and
controls for your vehicle. Inthis manual, you’ll find
that pictures and words worktogether to explain In the caution area, we tell you whatthe hazard is. Then
things quickly. we tell you what todo to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you or
Index others could be hurt.
A good place to look for what you need is the Index in
back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical list of what’s in
the manual, and the page number where you’llfind it.

iii
You will alsofind a circle In the notice area,we tell you about something that can
with a slash through it in damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would
this book. This safety not be covered by your warranty, and it could be costly.
symbol means “Don’t,’’ But the notice will tell you whatto do to help avoid
“Don’t do this” or “Don’t the damage.
let this happen.” When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or
in different words.
You’ll also see warning labelson your vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTIONor NOTICE.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Also, in this book you willfind these notices:

I NOTICE:
These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.

iv
Vehicle Symbols
These are some of the symbols you mayfind on your vehicle.

For example, These symbols These symbols These symbols These symbols Here are some
these symbols are important have to do with are on some of are used on other symbols
are used on an for you and your lamps: your controls: warning and you may see:
original battery: your passengers indicator lights:
whenever your
CAUTION
POSSIBLE
INJURY
A vehicle is
driven:
COOLANT -- FUSE -%-
TEMP
PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING
TURN
SIGNALS e LIGHTER
I
m
CAUSTIC

BURNS
FASTEN
SEAT
BELTS
WINDSHIELD
DEFROSTER BRAKE (a) HORN b

...
WINDOW
COOLANT
h
SPEAKER
b
POWER
WINDOW
DAYTIME
RUNNING *
LAMPS "'
0 DEFOGGER

ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
e, FUEL 93
SPARK OR 1,11,
FLAME
COULD
EXPLODE
BATTERY
FOG LAMPS #0 VENTILATING
FAN ANTI-LOCK
BRAKES
(@)
J

V
Model Reference
This manual covers these models:
Two-Door Utility Four-Door Utility

vi
Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

Here you’ll find information about the seats in your vehicle andhow to use your safety belts properly.
You can also
learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safetybelts.

1-2 Seats and Seat Controls 1-32 Rear Seat Passengers


1-10 Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone 1-35 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
1-14 Here Are Questions Many People Ask and Small Adults (4-DOOr Models)
About Safety Belts -- and the Answers 1-38 Center Rear Passenger Position
1-15 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly (4-Door Models)
1-15 Driver Position 1-39 Children
1-22 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy 1-42 Child Restraints
1-23 Right Front Passenger Position 1-53 Larger Children
1-23 Supplemental Inflatable 1-56 Safety Belt Extender
Restraint (SIR) System 1-56 Checking Your Restraint Systems
1-30 Center Front Passenger Position 1-57 Replacing Restraint System Parts
(4-DOOr Models) After a Crash
Seats and Seat Controls
This section tells you about the seats -- how to adjust
them, andfold them up and down.
Manual Front Seat

You can lose controlof the vehicleif you try to


adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when Move the lever under the front of the manual seat up to
the vehicleis not moving. unlock it. Slide the seat to where you wantit. Then
release the lever and try to move the seat with your body
to make sure the seat is locked into place.

1-2
Manual Lumbar Support Power Driver’s Seat(If Equipped)
If you have this feature, If you have this feature, there willbe a control pad on
there will be a knob on the your driver’s seat.
outside of the driver and
passenger bucket seats.
Turn the knob to the left to
increase lumbar support and
to the right to decrease
lumbar support.

Horizontal Control:Raise the front of the seat by


raising the forward edge of the button. Lowerthe front
of the seat by lowering the forward edge of the button.
Move the seat forward by moving the whole button
toward the front of the vehicle.

1-3
Raise the rear of the seat by raising the rear edge of the Power Lumbar Control (If Equipped)
button. Lowerthe rear of the seat by lowering the rear
edge of the button. Movethe seat rearward by moving If you have thiscontrol, it is
the whole button towardthe rear of the vehicle. located on the side of the
driver’s seat.
Moving the whole button upor down raises or lowers
the whole seat.
Vertical Control: Move the reclining front seatback
rearward by moving the button towardthe rear of the
vehicle. Move the seatback forward by moving the
button toward thefront of the vehicle.

Press and holdthe front of the control until you havethe


desired lumbar support.To decrease lumbar support,
press and hold the rear of the control.

1-4
Heated Front Seats(If Equipped) Reclining Front Seatbacks
If you have this feature,
the control is located on
the side of the seat. This
feature will quickly heat
the lower cushion and
lower backof the driver
and front passenger seats
for added comfort.

Press the lower part of the switch to turn the heateron


low. Press the upper part of the switch to turn the heater
on high. Put the switchin the center positionto turn the
heater off.
Release the lever to lock the seatback whereyou
want it. Pull up on the lever and theseat will go to an
upright position.

1-5
Sitting ina reclined position when your vehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle
up, your safety belts can’t do theirjob when
you’re reclined like this.
The shoulderbelt can’t do its job because it
won’t be against yourbody. Instead, it will be in
front of you. In a crash you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap beltcan’t do itsjob either. In a crash the
belt could go up over your abdomen. Thebelt
forces would be there, not at yourpelvic bones.
This could cause seriousinternal injuries.
But don’t have a seatback reclined
if your vehicle For proper protectionwhen the vehicle is in
is moving. motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety
belt properly.

1-6
Head Restraints To return the seatbackto the upright position, push the
seatback all the way back until the latch catches. If the
Head restraints are fixed on some models and adjustable seatback was reclined before being folded forward,it
on others. Slide an adjustable headrestraint up or down will return to the reclined position.
so that the topof the restraint is closest to the top of
your ears. This position reduces the chance of a neck
injury in a crash.
The head restraints tilt forward and rearwardalso.
Seatback Latches If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
The front seatback folds cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
forward to let people get press rearward on the seatback to be sure it
into the back seat or to is locked.
access the storage area
behind the seat.
To fold the front seatback Easy Entry Seat(2-Door Models)
forward, rotate the handle The right front seat of your vehicle makesit easy to get
on the side ofthe seat in and out of the rear seat.
rearward and pull the
seatback forward. Tilt the right front seatback completely forward and
the whole seat will slide forward.
0 Move the seatback to its original position after
someone gets into the rear seat area. Thenmove the
seat rearward until it locks.

1-7
’ /d
CAUTION:
I
I
If an easy entry right front seat isn’t locked, it
can move. In a sudden stop or crash, the person
sitting there could be injured. After you’ve used
on an easy entry seat
it, be sure to push rearward
to be sure itis locked.

0 Tilt the seatback completely forward againto


get out.

Rear Seats
Your vehicle hasa’foldingrear seat which lets youfold The rear seat release handles are
on the rearof the
the seatbacks down for more cargo space. seatbacks. Push back on the seatbacks as you pull up
on the handles.The head restraint will automatically
fold outof the way when the seatbackis folded down.
To raise the seatbacks, just lift up the seatbacks and
push until they lock in the upright position. Push and
pull on the seatbacks to check that the latches have
locked in the upright position.If they haven’t, have
them fixed immediately.

1-8
On two-door models withan inside mounted spare tire,
the driver’s side rear seat head restraint must be lifted
and held upright as the seatback is raised.Otherwise, the
head restraint will hit the spare tire and prevent the
seatback from properly latching.
Push and pull onthe head restraints to check that they
have locked in the upright position. If they haven’t, have
them fixed immediately.
The rear seat headrestraints are adjustable. Push the
button located underthe head restraint to raise or lower
it. Slide the head restraint up or down so that the top of
the head restraint is closest to the top of your ears. After
releasing the button, push and pullon the head restraint
to make sure it’s locked in place.
To return the headrestraints to the upright position,
reach behind the seats and pull the headrestraint up until
it locks into position.
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts
properly. It also tells you some things you should not do
A CAUTION:
with safety belts. It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
And it explains the Supplemental Inflatable Restraint inside or outside of a vehicle. In acollision,
(SIR), or air bag system. people riding in theseareas are morelikely to be
seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to
ride in any areaof your vehicle that is not
A CAUTION: equipped with seats and safetybelts. Be sure
everyone inyour vehicle is in a seat and using a
Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t wear safety belt properly.
a safety belt properly. If
you are ina crash and
you’re not wearing a safety belt, your injuries -
can be much worse. You can hit thingsinside the Your vehicle has a light that
vehicle or be ejected fromit. You can be seriously comes on as a reminder to
injured orkilled. In the same crash, you might buckle up. (See “Safety
not be if you are buckled up. Always fasten your Belt ReminderLight” in
safety belt, andcheck that yourpassengers’ belts the Index.)
are fastened properly too. A

1-10
In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to
wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a
crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes aremild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts theycould have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In m . ~crashes
~ t buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
Why Safety BeltsWork
When YOU ride in or on anything, you go as fast
as it goes. Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat
on wheels.

1-11
Put someoneon it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
doesn't stop.

1-12
The person keeps going until stopped by something. or the instrument panel...
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ...

1-13
wear safety belts?
A: Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them inthe future. But they are
or the safety belts!
supplemental systemsonly; so they work with
With safety belts, you slow down asthe vehicle does. safety belts-- not insteadof them. Everyair bag
You get more timeto stop. You stop over more distance, system ever offered for salehas required the use of
and your strongest bonestake the forces. That’s why safety belts. Evenif you’re in a vehicle that has air
safety belts make such good sense.
bags, you still have to buckle up to getthe most
protection. That’s true not only infrontal collisions,
but especially inside and other collisions.

1-14
&: If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
home, why should I wear safety belts?
Adults
A: You may be an excellent driver, but ifyou’re in an
accident -- even one that isn’t your fault -- you This part is only for people of adult size.
and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good Be aware that there are special things to know about safe
driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your belts and children. And there are different rules for smalle
control, such as bad drivers. children and babies. If a child will be riding in your
vehicle, see the part ofthis manual called “Children.”
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of Follow those rules for everyone’s protection.
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
First, you’ll want to know whichrestraint systems your
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
vehicle has.
(65 km/h).
We’ll start with the driver position.
Safety belts are for everyone.
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear
it properly.
1 . Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat (to see how, see “Seats” in the Index)
so you can sit UD straight.

1-15
Pull up onthe latch plate to make sureit is secure.
If the belt isn’t long enough,see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckleis
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quicklyif you ever had to.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across
you very quickly.If this happens, let the belt go back
slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle untilit clicks. 5. To make the lap part tight, pull downon the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up theon shoulder belt.

1-16
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug
on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be
less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it,
the belt would applyforce atyour abdomen.This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt
should go over the shoulder and across the chest.
These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.

1-17
What’s wrong with this?

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder isbelt


too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt should fit against your body.

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly


as much protection this way.

1-18
@ What’s wrong with this?
[ON:
You can be seriously injuredif your beltis
In a crash,
buckled in the wrong place like this.
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forceswould be there, notat the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal injuries.
Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.

I 1
I I I I I 1 I

A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

1-19
@ What's wrong with this?

r'

You can be seriouslyinjured if you wear the


shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
23 body would move toofar forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the
ribs, which aren't as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure internalorgans
like your liver or spleen.

A: The shoulder beltis worn under the arm. It should


be worn over the shoulder at all times.

1-20
What's wrong with this?

You can be seriously injuredby a twisted belt.In


a crash, you wouldn't have the full width of the
belt to spread impact forces.If a beltis twisted,
make it straightso it can work properly,or ask
your dealer tofix it.

A: The belt is twisted across the body.

1-21
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts workfor everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likelyto be
seriously injuredif they don’t wear safety belts.

To unlatch the belt,just push the button onthe buckle.


The belt shouldgo back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage boththe
belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should weara lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion shouldbe worn as low as possible, below
the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.

1-22
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the Supplemental Inflatable Restraint
mother, When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetuswon’t be hurt in a crash. For (SIR) System
pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making This part explains the Supplemental Inflatable Restraint
safety belts effective is wearing them properly. (SIR) system or air bag system.
Right Front Passenger Position Your vehicle has “Next Generation” reduced-force
frontal air bags -- one airbag for the driver and another
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s air bag for the right front passenger.
safety belt properly, see “Driver Position” earlier in
this section. Reduced-force frontal air bags are designed to help
reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same air bag. But even these air bags must inflate very
way as the driver’s safety belt -- except for onething. quickly if they are to do their job and comply with
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the beltout all federal regulations.
the way, you willengage the child restraint locking
feature. If this happens, just let thebelt go back all the
way and start again.

1-23
Here are the most important thingsto know about the air
bag system: CAUTION:
I

Air bags inflatewith great force, faster than the


blink of an eye. If you’re too close to an inflating
YOI :an be severely i: - !d or killed in a cr; I if air bag, it could seriouslyinjure you. This is true
--
you aren’t wearing your safety belt even if you even with reduced-force frontal air bags. Safety
belts help keepyou in position beforeand during
have air bags. Wearing your safety belt during a
crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with
inside thevehicle or being ejected fromit. Air reduced-force air bags. The driver shouldsit as
bags are “supplemental restraints” to the safety far back aspossible while still maintaining
--
belts. All air bags even reduced-force air control of the vehicle.
--
bags are designed to workwith safety belts,
but don’t replacethem. Air bags are designed to
work only in moderate tosevere crashes where
the frontof your vehicle hits something. They
aren’t designed to inflateat all in rollover, rear,
side or low-speed frontal crashes. And, for
unrestrained occupants, reduced-force air bags
may provideless protection in frontal crashes
than more forceful air bags have provided inthe
past. Everyone in your vehicle should wear a
--
safety belt properly whether or notthere’s an
air bag for thatperson.

1-24
A
1 $ There is an air bag readiness
light on the instrument
panel, which shows the air
bag symbol.
Children who are up against, or very close to,an
air bag when it inflates can be seriouslyinjured
or killed. This istrue even thoughyour vehicle
has reduced-force frontal air bags. Air bags plus
lap-shoulder belts offerthe best protectionfor The system checks the air bag electrical system for
adults, but not for young children and infants. malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See “Air Bag ReadinessLight” in the Index
Neitherthe vehicle’s safety belt systemnor its air for more information.
bag system is designedfor them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
see the part of this manual called “Children”and
see the caution labels on the sunvisors and the
right frontpassenger’s safety belt.

1-25
How the Air Bag System Works

The right front passenger’s air bag is in the instrument


panel on the passenger’sside.
Where are the air bags?
The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the steering. wheel.

1-26
as a parked car, the threshold level willbe higher. The
air bag is not designedto inflate in rollovers, side
impacts or rear impacts, because inflation wouldnot
help the occupant.
If something is between an occupant and an air
bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it In any particular crash, no one can say whether anair
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
might force the object into that person. The path
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
of an inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t Inflation is determined bythe angle of the impact and
put anything between an occupant and an air how quickly the vehicle slows downin frontal or
bag, and don’t attachor put anything on the near-frontal impacts.
steering wheel hub or on or near any other air
The air bag system is designedto work properly under a
bag covering.
wide range of conditions, including off-road usage.
Observe safe driving speeds, especially on rough terrain.
When should an air bag inflate? As always, wear your safetybelt. See “Off-Road
Driving’’ in the Index for more tips on off-road driving.
An air bag is designedto inflate in a moderateto severe
frontal or near-frontal crash. The air bag will inflate What makes an air bag inflate?
only if the impact speed isabove the system’s designed In an impact ofsufficient severity, the air bag sensing
“threshold level.” If your vehicle goesstraight into a system detects that the vehicle isin a crash. The sensing
wall that doesn’t moveor deform, the threshold level is system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which
about 14 to 18 mph (23 to 29 k d h ) . The threshold level inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related
can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the
it can be somewhat above or below this range. If your steering wheel and in the instrument panel infront of the
vehicle strikes something that willmove or deform, such right front passenger.

1-27
How does an air bag restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. Air bags supplement the protection When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the
air.
provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the forceof This dust could cause breathing problems for
the impact moreevenly over the occupant’s upper body,
people with a history of asthma or other
stopping the occupant more gradually.But air bags would
not help you in many types of collisions, including breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the
rollovers, rear impacts and side impacts, primarily vehicle should get out as soon it so.
asis safe to do
because an occupant’s motionis not toward those air If you have breathing problems but can’t get out
bags. Air bags should never be regarded as anything of the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get
more than a supplement to safety belts, and then only in fresh air by openinga window or door.
moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions.
What will you see afteran air bag inflates? Air bags are designedto inflate only once. After they
After an air bag inflates,it quickly deflates, so quickly that inflate, you’ll need somenew parts for your air bag
some people may not even realize the air bag inflated. system. If you don’t getthem, the air bag system
Some components of the air bag module -- the steering won’t be there to help protect you in another crash.
wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, or the instrument panel A new system will include air bag modules and
for the right front passenger’s bag -- will be hot for a short possibly other parts. The service manual for your
time. The parts of the bag that come into contact with you vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. Therewill be Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnostic module,
some smoke and dust coming from ventsin the deflated which records information about theair bag system.
air bags. Air bag inflation doesn’t prevent thedriver from The module records information aboutthe readiness
seeing or from being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it of the system, when the sensors are activated and
stop people from leaving the vehicle. driver’s safety belt usageat deployment.

1-28
0 Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle
system. Improper service can mean that your air bag
system won’t work properly. See your dealer for service.Air bags affecthow your vehicle should beserviced.
There are parts of the air bag system in several places
around your vehicle. You don’t want the system to
NOTICE: inflate while someone is workingon your vehicle. Your
dealer and the GM Service Manual have information
If you damage the covering for the driver’s or the about servicing your vehicle and theair bag system. To
purchase a service manual, see “Service and Owner
right frontpassenger’s air bag, the bagmay not
Publications’’ in the Index.
work properly. You may have to replace the air
bag module in the steering wheel or both the air
bag module and the instrument panel for the
right frontpassenger’s air bag. Do not open or
/A CAUTION:
break the air bag coverings.
For up totwo minutes after the ignition key is
turned off and the batteryis disconnected, an air
If your vehicle ever gets aintolot of water-- such as water up bag can still inflate during improper service. You
to the carpeting or higher-- or if water enters your vehicle can be injured if you are close to an air bag when
and soaks the carpet, the air bag controller
can be soaked and it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped with yellow tape
ruined. If this ever happens, and then you start your vehicle, or yellow connectors. Theyare probably partof
the damage could make the air bags inflate, even if there’s no
crash. You would have to replace the air bags as well as the the air bagsystem. Be sure tofollow proper
sensors and related parts.If your vehicle is ever ain flood, or service procedures, and make sure the person
if it’s exposed to water thatsoaks the carpet, you can avoid performing work foryou is qualified to doso.
needless repair costs by turning off the vehicle immediately.
Don’t let anyone start the vehicle, even to tow it, unless the
The air bag systemdoes not need regular maintenance.
battery cables are first disconnected.

1-29
Adding Equipmentto Your Air Center Front Passenger Position
Bag-Equipped Vehicle (4-Door Models)
@’ If I add a push bumper bf iibicycle rack to the
front ofmy vehicle, will it keep the air bags
from working properly?
A: As long as the push bumper or bicycle rack is
attached to your vehicle so that the vehicle’s basic
structure isn’t changed, it’s not likely to keep the
air bags from working properly in a crash.
e.’’ Is there anything I might add to the front of the
vehicle that could keep the air bags from
working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s Lap Belt
frame, bumper system, front end sheet metal or If your vehicle hasa front bench seat, someone can sit in
height, they may keep the air bag systemfrom the center position.
working properly. Also, the air bag system may not
work properly ifyou relocate any of the air bag
sensors. If you have any questions aboutthis, you
should contact Customer Assistance before you
modify your vehicle.(The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of
the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See “Customer Satisfaction Procedure” in the Index.)
When you sit in the center front seating position, you To make the belt shorter, pullits free end as shown until
have a lap safety belt, which hasno retractor. To make the belt is snug.
the belt longer,tilt the latch plate and pullit along Buckle, position and releaseit the same way as the lap
the belt. part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long enough
see “Safety Belt Extender”at the endof this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
SO YOU would be ableto unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if you ever had to.

1-31
Rear Seat Passengers
It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up!
Accident statistics show that unbelted people inthe rear
seat are hurt more often incrashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted canbe thrown
out of the vehicle ina crash. And they canstrike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t letit get twisted. The shoulder belt maylock if
you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this
happens, let the beltgo back slightlyto unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you more slowly.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The positions next to the windows havelap-shoulder
belts. Here’s how to wear one properly.

1-32
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way, it
will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and
start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle


end of the belt as you pullup on the shoulder part.

1-33
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug
I I I I on the hips, just touching the thighs. Ina crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be
less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it,
the belt would apply forceat your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt
should go over the shoulder and across the chest.
These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The safety belt locksif there’s a sudden stop or a crash.
The safety beltalso locks if you pull the belt very
quickly out of the retractor.

I
CAUTIi- N:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

1-34
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
for Children and Small Adults
(4-DoorModels)
Four-door models haverear shoulder belt comfort
guides. This feature will provide addedsafety belt
comfort for children who have outgrown child restraints
and for small adults. When installed on a shoulder belt,
the comfort guide pulls the belt awayfrom the neck
and head.
There is one guide for each outside passenger positionin
the rear seat. To provide added safety belt comfort for
children whohave outgrown child restraints and for
smaller adults, the comfort guides maybe installed on
the shoulder belts. Here’s howto install a comfort guide
and use the safety belt:
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.

1-35
1

1. Pull the elastic cordout from between the edgeof 2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
the seatback and the interior body to remove the cord must be under the belt. Then, place
the guide
guide from its storage clip. over the belt, and insert the
two edges of the beltinto
the slots of the guide.

1-36
.. ... ... ... . . ...,:

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted andit lies flat. 4. Buckle, position andrelease the safety belt as
The elastic cord mustbe under the belt and the guide described in “Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions
on top. earlier in this section. Make sure that the shoulder
belt crosses the shoulder.

1-37
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the Lap Belt
belt edges together so that you can take themout from
the guides, Pull the guide upwardto expose its storage
clip, and then slide theguide onto the clip. Rotate the
guide andclip inward and in between the seatback and
the interior body, leaving only theloop of elastic
cord exposed.
Center Rear PassengerPosition
@-DoorModels)

When you sit in the center rearseating position, you


have a lap safety belt which has a retractor.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou.
Don’t let it get twisted,
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plateto make sure it is secure.
3. Feed the lap belt into the retractor to tighten it.
1-38
Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! That includes
infants and all children smaller than adult size. Neither
the distance traveled northe age and size of the traveler
changes the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints.
In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children upto some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Smaller Childrenand Babies
I-
A CAUTION: I

Children who are up against, or very close to, any


air bagwhen it inflates canbe seriously injured
4. Position and release it the same way as the lap part or killed. This is true even though yourvehicle
of a lap-shoulder belt. has reduced-force frontalair bags. Air bags plus
If the belt isn’t longenough, see “Safety Belt lap-shoulder belts offer the best protection for
Extender” at the end of this section. Make sure the adults, but not for young children and infants.
release button on the buckle is positioned so you Neither thevehicle’s safety belt system nor its air
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if bag systemis designed for them. Young children
you ever had to. and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle.

1-39
Infants need complete support, including supportfor
CAUTION: the head and neck.This is necessary becausean infant’s
neck is weakand its head weighsso much compared
with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
~ Smaller childrenand babies should alwaysbe rear-facing restraint settles into the restraint, so the
restrained in a child or infantrestraint. The crash forces can bedistributed across the strongest part
instructions for the restraint will saywhether it is of the infant’s body, the back and shoulders. A baby
the right type and size for your child.A very should be secured in an appropriate infant restraint.
young child’ship bones are so small that a This is so important that manyhospitals today won’t
regular belt might not staylow on the hips,as it release a newborn infant to its parents unless there is an
should. Instead, the belt will likely be over the infant restraint availablefor the baby’s first trip in a
child’s abdomen.In a crash, the belt would apply motor vehicle.
force right on the child’s abdomen, which could
cause seriousor fatalinjuries. So, be sure that
any child small enoughfor one is always properly
restrained in a child or infant restraint.

1-40
~~ ~ ~~~ ~

at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 124b. (5.5 kg) baby


will suddenly become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on
your arms. The babywould be almost impossible
to hold.
Secure the baby in an infant restraint.

~~ ~~ ~

Never hold a baby in your arms while riding ina


--
vehicle. A baby doesn't weigh much until a
crash. Duringa crash a baby will become so
heavy you can't hold it. For example, in a crash
CAUTION: (Continued)

1-41
Child Restraints
Every time infants and young children ride in
by
vehicles, they should have protection provided
appropriate restraints.
&= What are the different typesof add-on
child restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints are available in four basic
types. When selecting a child restraint, take into
consideration not onlythe child’s weight and size,
but also whetheror not the restraint will be
compatible with the motor vehicle in which it
will be used.

An infant car bed (A) is a special bed made for use


in a motor vehicle. It’s an infant restraint system
designed to restrain or position a childon a
continuous flat surface. With an infant car bed,
make sure that the infant’s head reststoward the
center of the vehicle.

1-42
A rear-facing infant restraint (B) positions an infant
to face the rear of the vehicle. Rear-facing infant
restraints are designed for infants of up to about
20 Ibs. (9 kg) and about one year of age. This type
of restraint faces the rear so that the infant’s head,
neck and body can have the support they need in a
crash. Some infant seats come in two parts -- the
base stays secured in the vehicle and the seat part
is removable.

1-43
A forward-facing child restraint(C-E) positions a
child upright to face forward in the vehicle. These
forward-facing restraints are designedto help protect
children who are from20 to 40 lbs. (9 to 18 kg) and
about 26 to 40 inches (66 to 102 cm) in height, or up
to around four years of age. One type, a convertible
restraint, is designedto be used either as a rear-facing
infant seat or a forward-facing child seat.

1-44
A booster seat (F, G) is designed for children who
are about 40 to 60 lbs. (1 8 to 27 kg) and about
four to eight years of age. It’s designed to improve
the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Booster
seats with shields use lap-only belts; however,
booster seats without shields use lap-shoulder
belts. Booster seats can also help a child to see
out the window.

1-45
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designedto be used in a vehicle.If it is, it
will have a label saying thatit meets Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards. f
’ A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe
Then followthe instructions for the restraint. You may seriously injured orkilled if the right front
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
passenger’s air bag inflates, even though your
booklet, or both. These restraints use thebelt system in
your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within vehicle has reduced-force frontalair bags. This is
the restraint to help reduce the chanceof personal injury. because the backof the rear-facingchild
The instructions thatcome with the infant or child restraint would be very close to the inflatingair
restraint will showyou how to do that. Both the owner’s bag. Always secure a rear-facingchild restraint
manual and the child restraint instructions are important, in a rear seat outsideposition.
so if either one of theseis not available, obtain a You may secure a forward-facingchild restraint
replacement copyfrom the manufacturer. in the right front seat, but before you do, always
Where to Put the Restraint move the front passenger seat as far back as it
will go. It’s better to secure thechild restraint in
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they a rear seat outside position.
are restrained in therear rather than the front seat.We at
General Motors therefore recommend thatyou put your
child restraint in arear seat outside position.Never put a Wherever you install it, be sureto secure the child
rear-facing child restraint in thefront passenger seat. restraint properly.
Here’s why:
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in
the vehicle. Be sureto properly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it.

1-46
Top Strap

Don’t use thefront set of tie-down brackets. Anchor the


top strap to the rearmost bracket on the same sideof the
If your child restraint has a top strap, it should be vehicle as the child restraint.
anchored. Anchor brackets for the rear outside seat
positions are located on the floor in the cargo area. Once you have the top strap anchored, you’ll be ready to
secure the child restraint itself.

1-47
Securing a Child Restraint in Rear
a
Outside Seat Position

You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt.See the earlier part


about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure
to follow the instructionsthat came with the child
restraint. Secure the child inthe child restraint when and 3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
as the instructions say. positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
1. Put the restraint on the seat. safety belt quicklyif you ever had to.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run thelap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt throughor
around the restraint.The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If the shoulder belt goesin front of the child’sface or
neck, putit behind the child restraint.

1-48
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of 5. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into
the retractor to set the lock. the retractor while you push down on the child
restraint. If you’re using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee
to push down on thechild restraint as you tighten
the belt.
6. Push and pullthe child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.

1-49
To remove thechild restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt Front Seat Position
will move freely again and be readyto work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
Center Seat Positions (4-Door Models)

Your vehicle hasa right front passenger air bag.Never


put a rear-facing child restraint in thisseat. Here’s why:

Don’t use child restraints in these positions.The


restraints won’t work properly.

1-50
If the shoulder belt goes infront of the child’s face or
neck, putit behind thechild restraint.

A child ina rear-facing child restraint can be


seriously injured orkilled if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates, even though your
vehicle has reduced-forcefrontal air bags. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very closeto the inflatingair
bag. Always secure a rear-facing child restraint
in therear seat.
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part
about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure
to follow the instructions that came with the child
restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and
as the instructions say.
1. Because your vehicle hasa right front passenger air
bag, always movethe seat as far back as it will go
before securing a forward-facing child restraint. 4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
(See “Seats” in the Index.) positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
2. Put the restraint on the seat. safety belt quicklyif you ever had to.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safetybelt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-51
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the
way out of 6. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into the
the retractor to set the lock. retractor while you push down on the child restraint.
You may find it helpful to useyour knee to push down
on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sureit is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all way.the The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
Larger Children Children who have outgrownchild restraints should
wear the vehicle’s safetybelts.
If you have the choice, a child should sit next to a
window so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat. But they needto use the
safety belts properly.
0 Children who aren’t buckled up can be thrown out
in a crash.
0 Children who aren’t buckled upcan strike other
people who are.

1-53
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt. The
belt can’t properlyspread the impactforces. In a
crash, thetwo children can be crushed together
and seriously injured. A belt must be used
by
only one personat a time.

Q: What if a child is wearinga lap-shoulder belt,


but thechild is so small that the shoulder belt
is
very close to thechild’s face or neck?
A: Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but
be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s
shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body
would have the restraint that belts provide. If the
child is sittingin a rear outside position of a
four-door model, see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides” in the Index. If the child isso small that
the shoulder belt is still very close to the child’s
face or neck, you might want to place the child ina
seat that has alap belt, if your vehicle has one.

1-54
I
I
A CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting ina seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulderpart is behind
the child. If the child wears the belt in thisway, in
a crash the child might slideunder the belt. The
belt’s force would then be applied right on the
child’s abdomen.That could cause seriousor
fatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, thelap portion of the belt


should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs.This applies belt forceto the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.

1-55
Safety Belt Extender Checking Your Restraint Systems
you
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminderlight
should use it. and all your belts, buckles, latchplates, retractors and
But if a safety belt isn’tlong enough tofasten, your anchorages are working properly.Look for any other
dealer will order youan extender. It’s free. When you go loose or damaged safety belt system parts.If you see
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the anything that might keepa safety belt system from
extender will be longenough for you. The extender will doing itsjob, have it repaired.
be just foryou, andjust forthe seat in your vehiclethat Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you ina
you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use it crash. They can rip apart under impactforces. If a belt is
only for theseat it is madeto fit. To wear it, just attach it torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
to the regular safety belt.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repairedor replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)

1-56
Replacing Restraint System Parts If belts are cut or damaged, replacethem. Collision
damage also may mean you will needto have safety belt
After a Crash or seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs
If you’ve had a crash,do you need newbelts? may be necessaryeven if the belt wasn’t being usedat
the time of the collision.
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would beif worn If an air baginflates, you’ll need toreplace air bag
during a more severe crash, then you need new belts. system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier
in this section.
If you ever see alabel on
the driver’s or the right
To help avoid personal
injury, belt assembly must
front passenger’s safety
be replaced if this vehicle is belt that says to replace the
in a collision or if “Replace belt, be sure to do so. Then
Belt” appears below. See
Owner’s Manual for more the new belt will be there
information. to help protect you in a
collision. You would see
this label on the belt near
the door opening.

1-57
& NOTES

1-58
Section 2 FeaturesandControls

Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on yourvehicle, and information on starting,
shifting and braking. Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systemsthat tell you if everything is
working properly -- and what to do if you have a problem.

2-2 Keys 2-28 Running Your Engine While You’re Parked


2-4 Door Locks (Automatic Transmission)
2-6 Keyless EntrySystem (If Equipped) 2-29 Locking Rear Axle (If Equipped)
2-9 EndgateLiftgate 2-29 Four-wheel Drive (If Equipped)
2- 12 Theft 2-3 1 Windows
2- 12 Passlock@ 2-33 Horn
2-13 New Vehicle “Break-In” 2-33 Tilt Wheel (If Equipped)
2- 14 Ignition Positions 2-34 Turn SignaVMultifunctionLever
2- 16 Starting Your Engine 2-40 Exterior Lamps
2-43 Interior Lamps
2-17 Engine Coolant Heater (IfEquipped) 2-44 Mirrors
2- 18 Automatic TransmissionOperation 2-46 Storage Compartments
2-2 1 Manual Transmission Operation 2-57 Ashtrays andCigarette Lighter
2-22 Parking Brake 2-57 Sun Visors
2-23 Shifting Into PARK (P) (Automatic 2-58 Accessory Power Outlets(If Equipped)
Transmission Only) 2-59 Sunroof (If Equipped)
2-26 Shifting Out of PARK (P) 2-60 Universal Transmitter(If Equipped)
(Automatic Transmission) 2-64 Instrument Panel
2-27 Parking Over Things That Burn 2-65 Instrument Panel Cluster
2-27 Engine Exhaust 2-68 Warning Lights, Gages andIndicators
2-1
Keys

A CAUTION: I I
Leaving young children in a vehicle with the
ignition key is dangerous for many reasons.
A child or others could be badly injured
or
even killed.
They could operate power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. Don't

1leave the keys in a vehicle with young children.

2-2
This vehicle has one The key code number tells your dealer or a qualified
double-sided key for locksmith how to make extra keys. Keepthis number in
the ignition, endgate, a safe place. If you lose your keys, you’ll be ableto have
spare tire lock new ones madeeasily using this number. Your selling
(two-door vehicles) dealer should also have this number.
and door locks. It will
fit with either side up.
I NOTICE:
Your vehicle has a number of new features that
can help prevent theft. But you can have a lot o
trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock
your keys inside.You may even have to damage
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer provides So be sure you have
your vehicle to get in.
the owner with a pair of identical keys and a key extra keys.
code number. - - -

2-3
Door Locks You can use the Keyless EntrySystem, if you have
this option.
You can use yourkey to unlock your doorfrom
the outside.
To lock your door fromthe inside, slide the lever on
Unlocked doors canbe dangerous. your inside doordown.
-- --
Passengers especially children can easily
To unlock the door,slide the
open the doors and fall out. When a door is lever on your inside door
locked, the inside handlewon’t open it. up. You will see a red area
Outsiders caneasily enter through anunlocked on the lever.
door when you slow down or stop your vehicle.
This may not be so obvious: You increase the
chance of being thrown outof the vehicle in a
crash if the doors aren’tlocked. Wear safety belts
properly, lock your doors, andyou will be far
better off whenever you drive yourvehicle.

There are several waysto lock and unlock your vehicle.

2-4
Power Door Locks (If Equipped) Rear Door SecurityLock (If Equipped)
With this feature, you can
lock the rear doorsso they
can’t be opened from the
inside by passengers.
Move the lock upto lock
the doors and downto
release the door locks.

Lockout Prevention
If your vehicle has power doorlocks, the switch is To protect you from locking your keyin the vehicle, this
located on the armrest. Remove the ignition key and feature stops the powerdoor locks from locking when
press LOCK to lock all the doors at once. the keys are in the ignition and adoor is open.
To unlock the doors, press the raised area nextto the If the power lock switchis pressed when a door is open
key symbol. and the key is in the ignition,all the doors will lock and
On four-door models, thelever on each rear door works the driver’s door will unlock.
only that door’s lock.

2-5
Leaving Your Vehicle Changes or modifications to this system by other than an
authorized servicefacility could voidauthorization to
If you are leaving the vehicle, take your key, open your use this equipment.
door and setthe locks from inside. Then get out and
close the door. This system has a range of about 3 feet (1 m) up to
30 feet (9 m). At times you may notice a decrease in
Keyless Entry System(If Equipped) range. This is normal for any remote keyless entry
If your vehicle has thisoption, you can lock and unlock system. If the transmitter does not workor if you have
your doors and rearendgate from about 3 feet (1 m) up to stand closer to your vehiclefor the transmitter to
to 30 feet (9 m) away using the remote keyless entry work, try this:
transmitter supplied with yourvehicle. 0 Check to determine if battery replacementor
Your keyless entry systemoperates on a radio frequency resynchronization is necessary. See the instructions
subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) that follow.
Rules and with Industry Canada. 0 Check the distance. You may be too far from your
This device complies withPart 15 of the FCC Rules. vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy
Operation is subject tothe following two conditions: or snowy weather.
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, 0 Check the location. Other vehiclesor objects may be
and (2) this device must accept any interference blocking the signal. Takea few steps to the left or
received, including interference that maycause right, hold the transmitter higher, and tryagain.
undesired operation. 0 If you’re still having trouble, see your dealer or a
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. qualified technicianfor service.
Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesiredoperation of
the device.

2-6
Operation Matching Transmitter(s)To Your Vehicle
When you press UNLOCK, the driver’sdoor will Each remote keyless entrytransmitter is coded to
unlock automatically, the parking lamps will flash and prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
the interior lights will go on. If you press UNLOCK If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be
again within three seconds, the remaining doors will purchased through your dealer. Rememberto bring any
unlock, the parking lamps will flash and the interior remaining transmitters with you when you go to your
lights will go on. Press LOCK to lock all the doors. dealer. Whenthe dealer matches the replacement
Press LOCK again withinthree seconds and the horn transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
will chirp. must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
Press the REAR button twice within three seconds to
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your
vehicle. Each vehicle canhave only four transmitters
unlock the rearliftgate glass, the parking lamps will
matched to it.
flash and the interior lights will go on. If your vehicle
has an automatic transmission, the transmission Battery Replacement
must be inPARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If your
vehicle has a manual transmission, you must engage Under normal use,the battery in yourremote keyless
the parking brake. entry transmitter should last about two years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
Remote Panic Alarm work at the normal range in any location. If you have to
When the button with the horn symbol onthe key get close to your vehiclebefore the transmitter works,
transmitter is pressed, the horn will sound and the it’s probablytime to change the battery.
headlamps and taillamps will flash for up to 30 seconds.
This can be turned off by pressing the horn button again,
waiting for 30 seconds, or starting the vehicle.

2-7
1. Insert a dime in theslot between the covers of the
NOTICE: transmitter housing near the key ring hole. Remove
the bottom by twisting the dime.
When replacing the battery, use care not to touch 2. Remove and replace the battery with a three volt
any of the circuitry.Static from your body CR2032 or equivalent battery,positive (+) side up.
transferred to these surfaces may damage 3. Align the covers andsnap them together.
the transmitter.
4. Resynchronize the transmitter.
To replace the battery in the keyless entry transmitter: 5 . Check the operation of the transmitter.
Resynchronization
Resynchronization may be necessary due tothe security
method used by this system.The transmitter does not
send the samesignal twice to the receiver.The receiver
will not respondto a signal it has been sent previously.
This prevents anyone from recording and playing back
the signal from the transmitter.
To resynchronize your transmitter, stand close to your
vehicle and press and hold the LOCK and UNLOCK
buttons on the transmitter at thesame time for seven
seconds. The door locks should cycle to confirm
synchronization. If the locks do not cycle, see your
dealer for service.

2-8
EndgateLiftgate Endgate-Mounted Spare
If your vehicle hasan endgate-mounted spare tire
carrier, you must move thecarrier arm outof the way to
open the glass.
Here’s how to move the arm:
It can be dangerous to drive with the rear
window, endgate or liftgate open because carbon
monoxide (CO) gas can come into your vehicle.
You can’t see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
If you must drivewith the rearwindow, endgate
or liftgate openor if electrical wiringor other
cable connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the rear window, endgate
or liftgate:
Make sure all windows are shut.
lhrn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed with the setting on
VENT. That will force outside air into your
vehicle. See 6 4 C ~Controls’’
~ 0 ~in theIndex. 1. Squeeze the release handle to free the carrier arm.
If you have air outletson or under the 2. Swing the carrier arm away from the endgate. You
instrument panel, open them all the way. may need to give it a slight tug.
See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.
3. To latch the carrier arm, swing it toward the endgate.

2-9
EndgateLiftgate Release
To open a mechanical lock systemfrom the outside,
I Reach inside the endgate to
lift the handle and open
insert the key into the lock and turn itto the left to
unlock theglass.
The endgate and glass willautomatically lock
when shut.
To open a power lock systemfrom the outside, insert the
key into the lock button and turn
to the left. All doors
will unlock.
You may also use the keyless entry system, or the power
door locks, if you’re vehicle is so equipped.
The endgate can be opened withouta key if the driver’s
When doors are unlocked, door is unlocked. Theendgate glass will not releaseif
press the buttonto open the vehicleis in gear.
the glass.
To lock a power lock systemfrom the outside, insert the
key into the lock button andturn to the right. All doors
will lock.

2-10
Remote Rear Glass Release so equipped. Use the handle to open the liftgate. Press
the button to openthe glass when the liftgate is closed.

1 This button on the


passenger’s side of the
steering column allows you
to release the rear glass
The glass won’t release if the vehicle is in gear.
Emergency Release for Opening
EndgateLiftgate
1. Peel back or slit the carpet locally to expose the
access hole in the trim panel.
1 1 2. Use a thin screwdriver
to reach through the
access holes in boththe
trim panel andthe
If your vehicle hasan automatic transmission, your shift hardware cover.
lever must be in PARK(P) or NEUTRAL (N) for the
Pry the release lever
release to work.
toward the passenger’s
If you have a manual transmission, either with or side untilthe glass latch
without the Keyless Entry option, you must apply your pops open.
parking brake or have the ignition off before you can
open the endgateglass.
Liftgate Release
3. Reattach the carpet securely.
Insert the key in the lock button and turn tothe left. All
doors will unlock. You may also use the power lock
switches or the Keyless EntrySystem, if your vehicle is

2-11
Theft Parking Lots
Vehicle theft is big business, especially insome cities. If you park in alot where someone will be watching
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent your vehicle, it’s bestto lock it up and take your keys.
features, we know that nothing we puton itcan makeit But what ifyou have to leave your ignition key? What if
impossible to steal. However, there are ways you you have to leave something valuable in your vehicle?
can help. Put your valuables in a storage area, like your
glove box.
Key in the Ignition
0 Lock all the doors except the driver’s.
If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an
easy targetfor joy riders or professional thieves -- so Passlock@
don’t do it.
Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock
When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s door, theft-deterrent system.
you’ll hear a chime reminding you to remove your key
from the ignition and takeit with you. Always do this. Passlock is a passive theft-deterrent system.The system
Your steering wheel will be locked, andso will your is armed once the key is removed from the ignition.
ignition. If you have an automatic transmission, taking Passlock enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder
is
your key outalso locks your transmission. And turned with a valid key.If a correct key is not used,fuel
remember to lock the doors. is disabled.
During normal operation, the SECURITY light will go
Parking at Night off after the engine is started.
Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock your
vehicle. Rememberto keep your valuables out of sight.
Put them in a storage area,or take them withyou.

2-12
If the enginestalls and the SECURITY light flashes, New Vehicle “Break-In”
wait about 10 minutes until the light stops flashing
before trying to restart the engine.Remember to release
the key from theSTART position as soon as the NOTICE:
engine starts.
If the engine does not start after three (3) tries, the Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate
vehicle needs service. “break-in.” Butit will perform better in thelong
If you are driving and the SECURITY light comes on, run if you follow these guidelines:
you will beable to restart the engine if you turn the a Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or
engine off. However, your Passlock system is not less for thefirst 500 miles (805 km).
working properly and must be serviced by your dealer. 0 Don’t drive at any --
one speed fast or
Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock at this time.
You may also want to check the fuse(see “Fuses and
--
slow for the first500 miles (805 km).
Don’t make full-throttle starts.
Circuit Breakers” in the Index). Seeyour dealer 0 Avoid making hard stops for the first
for service.
200 miles (322 km) orso. During this time
If the SECURITY light flashes, wait until the light stops your new brake linings aren’tyet broken
flashing before starting the engine. in. Hard stopswith new linings can mean
If the SECURITY light comes on while the engine is premature wear and earlier replacement.
running, a problem has been detected and the system Follow this breaking-in guideline every
may need service. See your dealer for service. time you get new brake linings.
0 Don’t tow a trailer during break-in.
In an emergency, call the GM Roadside Assistance
Center. See “Roadside Assistance” in the Index. See “Towing a Trailer’’ in the Index for
more information.

2-13
Ignition Positions
Use the key to turn the ignition switchto five
NOTICE:
different positions.
Don’t operate accessories in the ACCESSORY
position for long periods of time. Prolonged
C operation of accessories in the ACCESSORY
position could drain your battery and prevent
you from starting your vehicle.

LOCK (B): This position locks your ignition, steering


wheel and transmission. It’sa theft-deterrent feature.
You will only be able to remove your key when the
ignition is turned to LOCK.
A OFF (C): This position lets you turn off the engine but
still turn the steering wheel.Use OFF if you must have
your vehicle in motion while the engine is off (for
example, if your vehicleis being towed).
PLCCESSORY (A): This position lets you use things RUN (D): This is the position for driving.
-

like the radio and the windshield wipers when the START (E): This position starts your engine.
engine is off. Push in the key and turn it toward you.
Your steering wheel will remain locked, just asit was
before you inserted the key.

2-14
’ A CAUTION: Key Release Button
The kev, cannot be removed
from the ignitionof manual
On manual transmissionvehicles, turning thekey transmission vehicles
to LOCK will lock the steering column and result unless the key release
in a loss of ability to steer the
vehicle. This could
cause a collision. If you need to turn the engine
off while the vehicle is moving,turn the key only
to OFF. Don’t press thekey release button while
the vehicle is moving.

I NOTICE: To remove the keyon manual transmission vehicles,


turn the key to OFF. Then turn the keyto LOCK while
If your key seems stuck inLOCK and you can’t pressing the keyrelease button down at the same time.
turn it, be sureyou are using the correctkey; if Pull the key straightout.
so, is it all theway in? If it is, then turn the
On automatic transmission vehicles, turn the keyto
steering wheel left and rightwhile you turn the
LOCK and pull it straight out.
key hard. But turn thekey only with your hand.
Using a tool to force itcould break thekey or the
ignition switch.If none of this works, then your
vehicle needs service.

2-15
Retained AccessoryPower Manual Transmission
Your vehicle is equipped witha Retained Accessory The gear selector shouldbe in NEUTRAL (N) and the
Power (RAP)feature which will allowcertain features parking brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal to the
of your vehicleto continue to work upto 20 minutes floor and start theengine. Your vehicle won’t start if the
after the ignition key is turnedto OW. clutch pedal is not all the way down-- that’s a
Your radio, power windows, sunroof and overhead safety feature.
console will work when the ignition key is in RUN or 1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your
ACCESSORY. Once the keyis turned from RUN to ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
OFF,these features will continue to work for up to go of the key. The idle speed willgo down as your
20 minutes or until a door is opened. engine gets warm.
Starting Your Engine
Automatic Transmission NOTICE:
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). Holding your key in START for longer than
Your engine won’t start in any other position-- that’s a 15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be
safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving, drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
damage your starter motor.

NOTICE: 2. If it doesn’t start right away, hold your keyin


START. If it doesn’tstart in 10 seconds, push the
Don’t tryto shift toPARK (P) if your vehicle is accelerator pedal all the way down for five more
moving. If you do, you could damage the seconds, unless it starts sooner.
transmission. Shift toPARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.

2-16
3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
stops), wait 15 seconds and start over.
1. Turn off the engine.
When the engine starts, let go of the key and the
accelerator pedal. 2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The
cord is located on the driver’s side of the engine
compartment, behind the underhood fuse block.
NOTICE: 3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 1 10-volt AC outlet.

Your engine is designed to work with the


electronics in yourvehicle. If you add electrical
parts oraccessories, you could change theway
the engine operates.Before adding electrical Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t, could cause an electricalshock. Also, the wrong
your engine might not perform properly. kind of extension cord could overheat and cause
If you ever have to have your vehicle towed, see, a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the
the partof this manual thattells howto do it cord intoa properly grounded three-prong
without damaging yourvehicle. See “Towing 110-volt AC outlet. If the cordwon’t reach, use a
Your Vehicle” in the Index. heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for
at least 15 amps.
Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)
In very cold weather, 0°F (- 1 SOC) or colder, the engine 4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and store
coolant heater can help. You’ll get easier starting and the cord as it was before to keep it awayfrom moving
better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually, engine parts. If you don’t, it could be damaged.
the coolant heater should beplugged in a minimum of
four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
2-17
How long should you keepthe coolant heater plugged PARK (P): This locks your rear wheels.It’s the best
in? The answer depends onthe outside temperature, the position to use when you start your engine because your
kind of oil you have, and someother things. Instead of vehicle can’t move easily.
trying to list everything here, we ask that youcontact
your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you the bestadvice for that
particular area.
Automatic Transmission Operation It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever isnot fully in PARK (P) with the
Your automatic transmission may havea shift lever
parking brakefirmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
located on theconsole between the seats or on the
steering column. Don’t leave yourvehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly.
If your vehicle is equipped witha column shift lever, it You or others could be injured.To be sure your
features an electronic shift position indicator within the vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
instrument cluster.This display must be powered level ground, always set your parking brake and
anytime the shift lever is capable of being moved out of move the shift leverto PARK (P).
PARK (P). This means that if your key is inOFF, but
not locked, there will bea small current drain on your See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in theIndex. If
battery which coulddischarge your battery overa period you’re pulling a trailer, see“Towing a nailer’’ in
of time. If you need to leave your key in the ignition in the Index.
OFF for an extended period, itis recommended that you
disconnect the battery cable from the batteryto prevent
discharging your battery.

2-18
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) range NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t
before starting the engine. Your vehicle has a connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re already
Brake-Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI). You have to moving, use NEUTRAL(N) only.
fully apply yourregular brakes before you can shift
from PARK (P) when the ignition key is in RUN. If you
cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift
lever -- push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P)
(press the button in on the console shift lever) as you
maintain brake application. Then move the shift lever Shifting outof PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while
into the gear you wish. See “Shifting Out of PARK (P)” your engine is “racing” (running at high speed)is
in the Index. dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the
brake pedal, yourvehicle could move very
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
rapidly. You could lose control and hitpeople or
objects. Don’t shift outof PARK (P) or
NOTICE: NEUTRAL (N) while your engineis racing.

Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle


is moving forward could damage your
transmission. Shift to REVERSE (R)only after NOTICE:
your vehicle is stopped.
Damage to your transmission caused by shifting
To rock yourvehicle back and forth to get out of snow, out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)with the
ice or sand without damaging your transmission, see engine racing isn’t covered by your warranty.
“Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index.

2-19
DRIVE (D): This position is fornormal driving. If you FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
need more powerfor passing, andyou’re: (but lowerfuel economy) than SECOND(2). You can
use it on very steep hills, or in deep snowor mud. If the
@ Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
selector lever is put in FIRST(1) while the vehicleis
accelerator pedal about halfwaydown.
moving forward, the transmission won’t shiftinto
Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the FIRST (1) until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
accelerator all the way down.
You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.
NOTICE:
DRTVE @) should not be used when towinga trailer,
carrying a heavy load, driving on steep hills, or for If your rear wheels can’t rotate, don’t try to
off-road driving. SelectTHIRD (3) when operating the drive. This might happen if you were stuck in
vehicle under any of these conditions. very deep sand ormud or were up against a solid
THIRD (3): This positionis also used for normal object. You could damage your transmission.
driving, howeverit offers more power and lower fuel Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold your
economy than DRIVE (D).You should use THIRD(3) vehicle there with only the acceleratorpedal. This
when towing a trailer, carrying a heavy load, driving on
steep hills or winding roads or for off-road driving. could overheat and damage the transmission. Use
your brakes or shift into PARK (P) to hold your
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but vehicle in position ona hill.
lower fuel economy than THIRD (3). You can use
SECOND (2) on hills. It can helpcontrol your speed as
you go downsteep mountain roads, but then you would
also want to use your brakesoff and on.
You can alS0 use SECOND(2) for starting your vehicle
from a stop on slippery roadsurfaces.

2-20
Manual Transmission Operation slowly let upon the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
5-Speed THIRD, FOURTHAND FIFTH (3,4 and 5): Shift
into THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5) the same
I This is your shift pattern.
way you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up onthe
clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the br
pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press the clutchpedal
and the brake pedal, and shift toNEUTRAL (N).
NEUTRAL (N): Use this position when you start or
idle your engine.
REVERSE (R):To back up, press the clutch pedal, wait
about six seconds, then shift into REVERSE (R). Then
Here’s how tooperate your transmission: let up on the clutch pedal slowly while pressing the
accelerator pedal.
FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into
FIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as
you press the accelerator pedal.
You can shift into FIRST (1) when you’re going less
I NOTICE:
than 20 mph (30 k d h ) . If you’ve cometo a complete Shift to REVERSE (R)only after your vehicle is
stop and it’s hardto shift into FIRST (I), put the shift stopped. Shifting to REVERSE (R) whileyour
lever in NEUTRAL (N) and let upon the clutch. Press vehicle is moving could damage your transmission.
the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST ( 1).
SECOND (2):Press the clutch pedal as you let up on Use REVERSE (R), along with the parking brake, for
the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2). Then, parking your vehicle.
2-2-
Shift Light
If you have a manual ' A CAUTION:
I I

A transmission, you have a


SHIFT light. If you skip more than one gear when you
downshift, you could lose controlof your vehicle.
And you could injure yourself or others. Don't shift
SHIFT down more than one gear when you downshift.

This light will show you when toshift to the next higher If your vehicle has four-wheeldrive and is equipped
gear for best fuel economy. with a manual transmission, disregardthe shift light
when the transfer case is in 4LO.
When this light comeson, you can shift to the next
higher gearif weather, road andtraffic conditions let Parking Brake
you. For the best fuel economy, accelerate slowly and
shift when e light comes on. To set the parking brake, hold theregular brake pedal
down with your rightfoot. Push down the parking brake
While you accelerate, it is normal for the light to go on pedal with yourleft foot. If the ignition is on, the brake
and off if youquickly change the positionof the system warninglight will come on.
accelerator. Ignore the SHIFT light when you downshift.
To release the parking brake, holdthe regular brake
pedal down.

2-22
If you are towing a trailer and you must park on a hill,
see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. That section shows
what to do first to keep the trailer from moving.
Shifting Into PARK (P)
(Automatic Transmission Only)

It can be dangerousto get out of your vehicle if the


shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehiclecan roll. If
you have left the engine running, the vehicle can
Pull the BRAKE RELEASE lever. It is located on the move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To
bottom of the driver’s side of the instrument panel. be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’re
on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow.
NOTICE: Always put theshift lever fully in PARK (P)with
the parking brakefirmly set. If you’re pulling a
trailer, see “Towing a Tkailer” in theIndex.
Driving with the parking brakeon can cause
your rear brakes to overheat.
You may have to
replace them, andyou could also damage other
parts of your vehicle.

2-23
Column Shift Lever
1. Hold the brake pedal downwith your right foot and
set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) position
like this:

Move the lever up asfar as it will go.


3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and takeit with you. If you can
leave your vehicle withthe key, your vehicleis in
PARK (P).

Pull the lever toward you.

2-24
Console Shift Lever Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and Running (Autom ’ic Transmission C dy)
~

set the parking brake.


2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) position like this:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the


engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift leveris not fully inPARK (P)
with the parking brake firmlyset. And, if you
leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could
overheat and even catch fire. You or otherscould
be injured. Don’tleave your vehicle with the
engine runningunless you have to.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine


running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmlyset before you leave it. After
Hold in the button on the lever. you’ve moved the shift leverinto PARK (P),hold the
regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the
Push the lever all the way toward the front of shift lever away fromPARK (P) without first pulling it
the vehicle. toward you (or pressing the button ona console shift
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK. lever). If you can, it means that the shift lever wasn’t
fully locked into PARK (P).
4. Remove the key andtake it with you. If you can leave
in (P).
your vehicle with the key, your vehicle isPARK
2-25
Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission) If you cannot shift out ofPARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever-- push the shift leverall the way into
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then move
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the the shift lever into the gear you want (you must press the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in shift lever button if you have the console shift lever.)
the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.” If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift out of PARK (P), try this:
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the 1. Turn the key to OFF.
driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into
PARK (P)” in the Index. 2. Apply and hold the brake untilthe end of Step 4.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift leverout of 3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake. 4. Start the vehicle and thenshift to the drive gear
If torque lock does occur,you may need to have another you want.
vehicle push yours a little uphillto take someof the 5. Have the vehicle fixed as soonas you can.
pressure fromthe parking pawl in the transmission,so
you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). Parking Your Vehicle (Manual
Shifting Out of Park(P) Transmission Models Only)
(Automatic Transmission) Before you get out of your vehicle, turn off your engine,
put your manual transmission inREVERSE (R) and
Your vehicle has a Brake-TransmissionShift Interlock firmly apply the parking brake.
(BTSI). You have to fully apply your regular brake
before you canshift from PARK (P) when the ignition is If you are parking on a hill, or if your vehicleis pulling
in RUN. See “Automatic Transmission Operation” in a trailer, see “Towinga Trailer” in the Index.
the Index.

2-26
F rking Over Things That Burn Engine Exhaust

Engine exhaust cankill. It contains thegas


carbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousnessand death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
Your vehicle was damaged in acollision.
Your vehicle was damaged when driving over
high points on the road or over road debris.
Repairs weren’t done correctly.
Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaustis coming into
your vehicle:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under yourvehicle and ignite. Don’t park Drive it only with all the windows down to
over papers,leaves, dry grass or other things that blow out any CO; and
can burn. ~ Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
I I

2-27
Running Your Engine While You’re
Parked (Automatic Transmission)
It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if
ever you have to, here are some things to know. It can be dangerous get to out of your vehicle if
the shift leveris not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you’ve left the
Idling the engine with the air system control off engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly.
could allow dangerous exhaust into your vehicle You or otherscould be injured.To be sure your
(see the earlier Caution under“Engine Exhaust”). vehicle won’t move, even when you’reon fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
Also, idling in aclosed-in place can let deadly move the shift lever to PARK (P).
carbon monoxide(CO) into yourvehicle even if
the fanswitch is at the highest setting. One place
this can happen is a garage. Exhaust with-- Follow the proper stepsto be sure your vehicle won’t
--
CO can come ineasily. NEVER park in a move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.
garage with the engine running. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.(See the Index.
“Blizzard” in theIndex.)

2-28
-
- cking Rear Axle(If Equipped) Electronic Transfer Case (If Equipped)
11 you have this feature, your locking rear axle can give If your four-wheel-drive
you additional traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or vehicle has the electronic
gravel. It works like a standard axle most of thetime, transfer case, the transfer
but when one of the rear wheels hasno traction and the case switches are above the
other does, this feature will allow the wheel with radio controls.
traction to move thevehicle.
Four-wheel Drive (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, you can send your
engine’s driving power to allfour wheels for extra
traction. To shift out of two-wheel drive and into
four-wheel drive, push the 4HI or 4LO button on the
transfer case switch. You should use 2HI for most
normal driving conditions. Use these switches to shift into and out of four-wheel
drive. You can choose among three driving settings:
2HI: This setting is for driving in most street and
NOTICE: highway situations. Your front axle is not engaged in
two-wheel drive. When this lamp is lit, it is about
Driving in the4HI or 4LO positions for a long one-half as bright as the others.
time on dry or wet pavement could shorten the
4HI: This setting engages your front axle to help
life of your vehicle’s drivetrain. drive your vehicle. Use 4HI when you need extra
traction, such as on snowy or icy roads, or in most
off-road situations.

2-29
4LO: This setting also engages your front axle to give with an automatic transmissionor the clutch pedal
you extra traction. You may never need4LO. It sends engaged in vehicles equipped witha manual
the maximum power to all four wheels. You might transmission. The preferred methodfor shifting into
choose 4LO if you were driving off-road in sand, mud 4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph
or deep snow and climbing or descending steep hills. (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and release the 4LO switch.
Indicator lights in the switches show you which setting You must wait for the 4LOindicator light to stop
you are in. The indicator lights will comeon briefly when flashing and remain illuminatedbefore shifting your
you turn on the ignition andone will stay on. If the lights transmission into gear or releasing the clutch pedal.
do not come on, you should take your vehiclein for If the 4LO switch is pressed when your vehicleis in
service. An indicator light will flashwhile shifting. It will gear and/or moving, the 4LO indicator light will flash
remain illuminated when the shift is completed. for 30 seconds and notcomplete the shift unless your
vehicle is moving slower than3 mph (4.8 k m h ) and
Shifting from 2HI to 4HI the transmission is in NEUTRAL (N)or the clutch
Press and release the 4HI switch. This can be done at pedal engaged.
any speed, and the front axle will lock automatically. On automatic transmission equipped vehicles,if your
transfer case does not shift into 4L0, your transmission
Shifting from 4HI to 2HI indicator switch may require adjustment. With your
Press and release the 2HI switch. This can be doneat transmission in NEUTRAL (N),press and release the
any speed, and thefront axle will unlock automatically. 4LO switch. While the 4LOindicator light is flashing,
shift your transmissioninto PARK (P). Waituntil the
Shifting from 2HIor 4HI to 4LO 4LO indicator light remains illuminated before shifting
To shift from 2HI or 4HI to 4L0, the vehicle mustbe your transmission into gear. This will get youinto 4L0,
stopped or moving less than 3 mph (4.8 kmh) with the but you should take your vehicle in for service to restore
transmission in NEUTRAL (N) in vehicles equipped normal operation.

2-30
Shifting from 4LO to 4HI or 2HI Windows
To shift from 4LO to 4HI or ZHI, your vehicle must be
stopped or moving less than 3 mph (4.8 k d h ) with the Manual Windows
transmission in NEUTRAL (N) or the clutch pedal Turn the hand crank on each door to raise or lower your
engaged. The preferred method for shifting out of 4LO manual side door windows.
is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2
km/h). Press and release the 4HI switch. You must wait Power Windows (If Equipped)
for the 4HI indicator light to stop flashingand remain If you have the optional power windows, thecontrols
illuminated before shifting your transmission into gear are on each of the side doors. With power windows, the
or releasing the clutch pedal. switches control the windows whenthe ignition is on or
If the 4HI switch is pressed when your vehicleis in gear when Retained Accessory Power (RAP)is present. (See
and/or moving, the 4HI indicator light will flash for “Retained Accessory Power” inthe Index.) The driver’s
30 seconds but not complete the shift unless the vehicle door has a switch for thepassenger windows as well.
is moving slower than 3 mph (4.8 kmh) and the
transmission is in NEUTRAL (N) or the clutch
pedal engaged.
On automatic transmission equipped vehicles, if your
transfer case doesnot shift into 4H1, your transmission
indicator switch may require adjustment. With your
transmission in NEUTRAL (N), press and release the
4HI switch. While the 4HI indicator light is flashing,
shift your transmission into PARK (P). Wait until the
4HI indicator light remains illuminated before shifting
your transmission into gear. This will get you into 4H1,
but you should take your vehicle in for service to restore
normal operation.
Express-Down Window
The driver’s window switch has an express-down
feature that allows you to lower it without holding the
window switch. Hold the driver’s window switch down
for more than half a secondto activate the express-down
feature. Lightly tap the switch to open the window
slightly. The express-downfeature can be interrupted at
any timeby pressing the up arrowend of the switch.
Lockout Switch
Four-door vehicles have a lockoutfeature to prevent
passengers from operating power windows. It is located
LOCK to activate this
on the driver’s door. Press
feature. Press NORM and the windows returnto
Press the side of the switch with the down arrow
to normal operation.
lower the window.
Press the side of the switch with the up arrow
to raise
the window.

2-32
Swing-Out Windows (2-Door Only) Tilt Wheel (If Equipped)
... ...
..,.. ... .
,
.a&:. your
vehicle
If has rear If you have the tilt steering
swing-out windows, unlatch wheel, you shouldadjust
them at their clasps and the steering wheel before
push out on the glass to you drive.
open them.

When you close the window, be sure the latch catches. You can raise it to the highest level to give your legs
more room whenyou enter and exit the vehicle.
Horn
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
To sound the horn, press the hornsymbols on the lever toward you. Move the steering wheelto a
steering wheel pad. comfortable level, then release the lever to lock the
wheel in place.
Do not adjust thesteering wheel while driving.

2-33
Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever Turn and Lane Change Signals
The turn signal hastwo upward (for right) andtwo
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or
LL
down. When theturn is finished, the lever will
return automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel will flashin the
direction of the turn or
lane change.

The lever on the left sideof the steering column To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
includes your: until the arrowstarts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will returnby
Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator itself when yourelease it.
Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows don’t
WindshieldWipers flash but just stay on,a signal bulb maybe burned out
WindshieldWasher and other drivers won’t see yourturn signal.

Cruise Control (If Equipped)

2-34
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you
signal a turn, check the fuse(see “Fuses and Circuit To change the headlamps from low beamto high or high
Breakers” in the Index) and for burned-out bulbs. to low, pull themultifunction lever all the way toward
you. Then release it.
If you have a trailer towing option with added wiringfor
the trailer lamps, a different turn signal flasher is used. When the high beams are
With this flasher installed, the signal indicator will flash on, this indicator light on
even if a turn signal bulb is burned out. Check the front the instrument panel will
and rear turn signal lamps regularly to make sure they also be on.
are working.
-7 Signal On Chime
l r your turn signal is left onror more than 3/4 of a mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the turn
signal. To turn off the chime, move the turn signal lever
to the off position.

2-35
Windshield Wipers For steady wiping at low speed, turn the band away
from you to the LO position. For high-speed wiping,
turn the band further,to HI. To stop the wipers, move
the band to the OFF position.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them.If they’re frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your bladesdo become
worn or damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
Windshield Washer
There is a paddle marked with the windshield washer
To spray
symbol at the top of the multifunction lever.
washer fluid on the windshield, push the paddle.The
wipers will clear the window and theneither stop or
return to your preset speed.

You control the windshield wipers by turning the band


with the wiper symbol on it.
For a single wiping cycle, turn the bandto MIST. Hold I
it there until the wipers start, thenlet go. The wipers will In freezing weather, don’t use
your washer until
stop afterone wipe. If you want more wipes, hold the the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
band on MIST longer. fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking
You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay your vision.
between wipes. This canbe very useful in light rainor
snow. Turn the band to choose the delay time.The
closer to LO, the shorter the delay,
2-36
Rear Window WasherWiper Cruise Control (If Equipped)
1 1 With cruise control, you can
I maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more
without keeping yourfoot
on the accelerator. This can
really help on longtrips.
Cruise control does not
work at speeds below about

If you have an automatic transmission and you apply


your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.
To turn the rear wiper on, slide the switch to either LO
or HI. To turn the wiper off, slide the switch to OFF.
To wash the window, press the wash button located on
the switch. The switch must be in either LO or HI.
The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle as
the windshield washer. However,the rearwindow
washer will runout of fluid before the windshield
washer. If you can wash your windshield but not your
rear window, check your fluid level.

2-37
If you have a manual transmission and you apply your Setting Cruise Control
brakes or push the clutch pedal, the cruise control will
shut off.
I CAUTION:
I

CAUTION: If you leave your cruise controlswitch on when


you’re not using cruise,you might hita button
Cruise control can be dangerous where you and go into cruisewhen you don’t want to. You
can’t drivesafely at a steadyspeed. So, could be startled and even lose control. Keep the
don’t use your cruise control on winding cruise controlswitch off until you want to use it.
roads or inheavy traffic.
Cruise control canbe dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes 1. Move the cruise control switch to ON.
in tire traction can causeneedless wheel 2. Get up to the speed you want.
spinning, andyou could lose control. Don’t
use cruise controlon slippery roads. 3. Press in the SET button
at the end of the lever
and release it.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.


2-38
Resuming a Set Speed Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control
Suppose you set your cruise control at adesired speed There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
and then you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts off 0 Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed.
the cruise control. But you don’t need toreset it. Press the button at the end of the lever, thenrelease
Once you’re going about the button and the accelerator pedal. You’ll now
25 mph (40 km/h) or more, cruise atthe higher speed.
you can move the cruise 0 Move the cruise switch from ON to WA. Hold it
control switch from ON there until you get up tothe speed you want, and
to R/A for about a half then release the switch. (To increase your speed in
a second. very small amounts, move the switch to WA. Each
time you do this, your vehicle willgo about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) faster.)
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control
Press in the button at the endof the lever until you
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and reach the lower speed you want, thenrelease it.
stay there.
To slow down in very small amounts, press the
Remember, if you holdthe switch at R/A longer than button for less than halfa second. Each time youdo
half a second, the vehicle will keep going faster until this, you’ll go 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
you release the switch or apply the brake. So unless you
want to go faster, don’t hold the switch at WA. Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Contro
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When
you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow
down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.

2-39
Using Cruise Control on Hills Exterior Lamps
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you may wantto step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going
downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear
to keep your speed down.Of course, applying the brake
takes you outof cruise control. Many drivers find this to
be too much trouble and don’t usecruise control on
steep hills. 0
Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
Step lightly on the brake pedal or push the clutch DOME OVERRIDE
pedal, if you have a manual transmission.
0 Move the cruise switch to OFF. Your parking lamp and headlamp switch on
is the
driver’s sideof your instrument panel.
Erasing SpeedMemory Rotate the knob to the right to the parking lamps symbol
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, to manually turn on:
your cruise control set speed memory iserased. Parking Lamps
Sidemarker Lamps
0 Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights

2-40
Rotate the knob to the right to the master lamps symbol There is a delay in the transition between the daytime an
to turn on all the lamps listed as wellas the headlamps. nighttime operation of the Daytime Running Lamps
Rotate the knob all theway to the left to turn off your (DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems so that driving
lamps and putthe system in auto headlamp mode. under bridges or bright overhead street lights does not
affect the system. TheDRL and automatic headlamp
Automatic Headlamp System system will only be affected when the light sensor seesa
change in lighting lasting longer than the delay.
When it is dark enough outside, your automatic
headlamp system will turnon your headlamps at the To idle your vehicle with the automatic headlamp
normal brightness along withother lamps such as the system off, set the parking brake while the ignition
is
taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps and the instrument off. Then start your vehicle. The automatic headlamp
panel lights. The radio lights willalso be dim. system will stay off until you release the parking brak
Your vehicle is equipped with a light sensoron the top As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
of the instrument panel under theradio speaker grill so headlamp system when you needit.
be sure it is not covered, which will cause the system to
be on wheneverthe ignition is on. Lamps On Reminder
The system may also turn on your headlamps when A reminder chime will sound when your headlamps or
driving through a parking garage, heavy overcast parking lamps are manually turned on and your ignition
weather, a tunnelor fueling your vehicle in a low-light is in OFF, LOCK or ACCESSORY. To turn the chime
area. This is normal. off, turn the knob all the wayto the left or turn the
instrument panel dimmer downto the fully dimmed
position. In the automatic mode, the headlamps turn of
once the ignition keyis in OFF.

2-41
Daytime Running Lamps To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, set the parking
brake. The DRL will stay off until you release the
Daytime Running Lamps(DIU) can make it easier for parking brake.
others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different driving As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
conditions, but they canbe especially helpful in the headlamp system whenyou need it.
short periods after dawn and beforesunset.
Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
on at
The DRL system will make your headlamps come
reduced brightness when: Use yourfog lamps for better vision in foggyor misty
conditions. Your parking lamps mustbe on for your fog
0 the ignition is on, lamps to work.
the headlamp switch is in automatic headlamp The fog lamp switchis on the instrument panel under
mode and the lamps switch. Press the switch to turn the fog lamps
the parking brake is released. on. Press the switch againto turn them off.A light will
glow in the switch when the fog lamps are on.
When the DRLare on, only your headlamps will beon.
The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t be
on. Remember, fog lamps alone willnot give off as much
The instrument panel won’tbe lit up either. light as your headlamps. Never use your fog lamps in
the dark without turningon your headlamps.
When it begins to get dark, the headlamps will
automatically switch from DRL to the regular headlamps. Fog lamps willgo off whenever your high-beam
headlamps come on. When the high beamsgo off, the
When you turn the headlamp switchoff, the regular lamps fog lamps will come on again.
will go off, and your headlamps will change to the reduced
brightness of DRL provided it is not dark outside.

2-42
Interior Lamps Front Reading Lamps (If Equipped)
Press the button near eachlamp on the overhead console
Brightness Control to turn the reading lamps on andoff. The lamps can be
Turn the switch next to the headlamp switch up to make swiveled to point in thedesired direction.
your instrument panel lights brighter. Turnthe switch all If you have the mini-console, press the lens on each
the way up to turn on the interior lamps. lamp to turn it on or off.
Exit Lighting Front Map Lamps(If Equipped)
With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on when If your vehicle has optional front map lamps, they are
you remove the key from the ignition to help you see located on the inside rearview mirror. They will
while exiting the vehicle. These lights will stay on for a automatically come on for approximately40 seconds when
short period of time and then willgo out. the doors are unlocked with the keyless entry transmitter
(if equipped) or until the ignition key is turned to RUN or
Illuminated Entry ACCESSORY. The lamps willalso stay on for
Your vehicle is equipped with an illuminated approximately 40 seconds after you exit the vehicle unless
entry feature. you lock the doors with the keyless entry transmitter.
When the doors are opened, the dome lamps will come You can also turn the lamps on and offby pressing the
on if the DOME OVERRIDE button is out. When switch near each lamp.
all the doors are closed, or the frontdoor handles are
lifted and released, the lamps will stay on for ashort
Dome Lamps
period of time and will then go out. When the The dome lamps will comeon when you open the doors.
DOME OVERRIDE buttonis pressed in, the You can also turn the dome lamps on byrotating the
lamps will go out immediately. thumb wheel, located next to the parking/headlamps
knob, all theway up to the top detent position. In this
position, the dome lamps will remain on whetherthe
doors are opened or closed.
2-43
You can use the DOME OVERRIDE button, located Mirrors
below the parkingheadlamp knob, to setthe dome
lamps to come on automatically when the doorsare Electrochromic Daymight Inside
opened, or to remain off. To turn the lampsoff, press the Rearview Mirror
button once. With the button inthis position, the dome
lamps will remainoff when the doors are open.To
return the lamps to automatic operation, press the button
again and return itto the ‘‘OU~”position. With the button
in this position, the domelamps will come on when you
open the door. This will notoverride the illuminated
entry feature.
Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature shuts off the dome, courtesy, vanity,
reading, glove box and underhood lampsif they are left
on for more than 20 minutes when the ignition is off.
This will keep your battery from running down. Your vehicle may have an automatic electrochromic
dayhight rearview mirror.
If the battery run-down protection shuts off the interior
lamps, to return to normal operationit may be This mirror automatically changesto reduce glare from
necessary to: headlamps behind you.A photocell on the backof the
mirror senses when it is becomingdark outside. Another
Shut off all lamps and close all doors, or photocell builtinto themirror surface senses when
0 Turn the ignition key to RUN. headlamps are behind you.

2-44
At night, when the glare is too high, the mirror will Power Remote Control Mirror
gradually darken to reduce glare (this change may take a
few seconds). The mirror will
return to its clear daytime The control is located on the
state when the glare is reduced. driver’s door armrest.
Press the button at the base of the mirror to turn on the
automatic feature. Thebutton has an indicator light to
show it is on. Press the button again to turn the
automatic feature off.
Time Delay
The automatic mirror has a timedelay feature which
prevents unnecessary switching from thenight back to
the day position. This delay prevents rapid changing of
the mirror as you drive under lights and through traffic.
Move the upper control to the left or right to cl. )se me
Cleaning the Photocells mirror, then pressthe arrows on the control paa IO adjust
Use a cotton swab and glass cleaner to clean the the mirror.
photocells when necessary.
Outside Manual AdjustMirror
Adjust your outside mirrors so you can just see the side
of your vehicle.
You can fold them before entering a car wash. Pullthe
mirrors in toward the vehicle. Push the mirrors back out
when finished.

2-45
Convex Outside Mirror Storage Compartments
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curvedso you can see more from the
Glove Box
driver’s seat. To open your glove box, lift the lever
on the front of the

1 glove box and lower the door.The glove box should not
beopenwhile driving.

4 OverheadConsole (If Equipped)


A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.

Heated Outside Rearview Mirror


(If Equipped)
When you operate the rear window defogger, a defogger
also warms the heated outside mirrorsto help clear them The overhead console includes reading lamps, a
of ice and snow. See “Rear Window Defogger’’ inthe compartment for a garage door opener, a temperature
Index for more information. and compass display and a storage compartment
for sunglasses.

2-46
Reading Lamps To install the garage door opener, first open the
compartment door by pressing the latchforward.
Press the button near each
lamp to turn the reading Peel the protective
lamps on and off. backing from thehook
and loop patch.

t
The lamps can also be swiveled to point in the
desired direction. Press it firmlyto the back of your garage door opener, as
close to the center of the opener as possible.
Installing a Garage Door Opener
Center the garage door opener activation button over
If you have a garage door opener,the front overhead the console door button and press theopener firmly
compartment can be used toconveniently store into place.
the opener.
If you have the optional universal transmitter, please see
“Universal Transmitter” in the Index for instructions on
how to use the system.

2-47
The pegs inside the Now, with the compartment
compartment door are used door closed, press the
to make surethe button on button again to makesure
the compartmentdoor will the garage door opener
contact the control button operates properly.
on the garage door opener.

Add one peg at a time until the garagedoor opener With the garage door opener positioned properly and the
operates with the compartment door closed when you right number of pegs in place, you should only have to
press the button. press the button slightly to operate the opener. Adjust the
position of the garage door opener and add or remove
pegs, as needed, until the opener operates properly.

2-48
Temperature and Compass Display Before you turn on the ignition and move thevehicle,
the temperature indicated will be the last outside
temperature recorded with the ignition on.
If the outside temperature is 37 OF (3 "C) or lower when
you turn on the ignition, ICE will appear on the display.
This is a warning to the driver that road conditions may
be icy, andthat appropriate precautions should be taken.
The compass is self-calibrating, so it does not need tobe
manually set. However, when your vehicle is new, the
compass may function erratically.If it does, CAL
(Calibration) will appear on the display. To correct the
problem, drive in a complete 360" circle three times,
and the compass will function normally.
Variance is the difference between magnetic north and
geographic north. In some areas, the difference between
The outsideair temperature and the compass are the two can begreat enough to cause false compass
displayed at the frontof the overhead console. The readings. If this happens, follow these instructions to set
control switches are located to the left of the display. the variancefor your particular location:
Turn the display on or off by pressing the ON/OFF
switch. Display the temperature in either degrees
Fahrenheit (English) or Celsius (metric) by pressing the
USMET switch.

2-49
3. After five seconds, VAR CAL will appear on the
display. When it does, release both buttons.
4. Press USNET until your zone number appears on
the display.
5. Press ON/OFF to enter your zone number. Your
variance is now set.

Driver Information System (If Equipped)


This system displays the outside air temperature,
compass direction andtrip information inthe
overhead console.
USMET: The USNET (United Statedmetric) button
allows you to switchthe display between the English
and metric system.
MODE: The MODE button can be used to toggle
1. Find your location on the zone map. Note your between three modes of operation: OFF,COMPREMP
zone number. and TRIP.
2. Press and hold boththe ON/OFF and the USMET OFF: This button turns the systemoff.
switches. The display will go off. COMPEEMP: The display providesthe outside
temperature and oneof eight compass readingsto
indicate the direction the vehicleis facing.

2-50
Before you turn on the ignition and move the vehicle, Variance is the difference between magnetic north and
the temperature indicated will be the last outside geographic north. In some areas, the difference between
temperature recorded with the ignition on. If the outside the two can be great enoughto cause false compass
temperature is 37°F (3°C)or lower, the display will readings. If this happens, follow these instructions to set
toggle between the word ICE andthe current the variance for your particular location:
temperature every eight seconds. This is a warning to 1. Find your location on the zone mapearlier in this
the driver that road conditions may be icy, andthat
section. Note your zone number.
appropriate precautions should be taken.
2. Press and hold both the MODE and the
USMET
The compass is self-calibrating7so it does not needto be
buttons in the COMP/TEMP mode.
manually set. However, if C (Calibration) is displayed,
the compass will need to becalibrated. You may also 3. After five seconds, the compass will acknowledge
place the compass in a noncalibrated mode by pressing the variation mode by displaying the current zone
and holding the MODE and USMET buttons number. When itdoes, release both buttons.
simultaneously while in the COMPREMPmode. After 4. Press USMET until your zone number appears on
about 10 seconds, the compass will display C and you the display.
can release the buttons. Drive the vehicle in a complete
360" circle three times at a speed of less than 5 mph 5. Press MODE toenter your zone number. Your
(8 km/h), and the compass will function normally. Once variance is nowset and the display willreturn to the
the calibration is complete, the display will return to a COMP/TEMP mode.
compass reading.

2-51
TRIP: Once in the TRIP mode, pressing theMODE Sunglasses Storage Compartment
button will step you through the followingTRIP functions:
0 AVG ECON: The average fuel economy since the
last reset is displayed.
INST ECON: Instantaneous fuel economy for the
last second of driving is displayed.
RANGE: The display indicates the estimated
distance that can betravelled with the remainingfuel
in the tank, based on the fuel economy for the last
few hoursof driving.
FUEL USED: The fuel used since the 1ast.resetis
displayed.
AVG SPEED: The average speed since the last reset
is displayed.
To reset the trip computer, press theMODE and US/MET The console has a sunglasses storage compartment.
buttons simultaneously for at least two seconds. All You will find a storage compartment on eachof the
functions will be displayed for halfa second once the front doors.
system is reset. Resetcan only be performed in the AVG
ECON, FUEL USED and AVG SPEED modes. All three Four-door models havestorage pockets and cupholders
modes are reset simultaneously. on rear doors.

2-52
Front Storage Area

If your vehicle hasthe center armrest compartment, lift


the cover to expose the storage area which includes slots
If your vehicle has this console compartment, squeeze for cassettes and a coinholder.
the frontlever while lifting the top to open it. You can
store cassettes in the slots in the front of the
compartment. If you have a compact disc player, you
may store compact discs inside the console.

2-53
Convenience Net(If Equipped) The convenience net is anchoredto the endgate door.
Attach the upperloops to the retainers oneither side of
the endgate opening(the label should bein the upper
passenger side corner, visiblefrom the rear of vehicle).
Attach the lower hooksto the rear cargo tie downs on
the floor.

I Roll-Up Cargo Cover(If Equipped)


If you have the optional cargo cover, you can use it to
cover items in the cargo areaof your vehicle.
Grasp the handle and unroll the cover. Latch the posts
into the sockets on the inside trim panelon the
passenger’s side of the vehicle to secure it.

IOU may have a convenience net in the rear of your


vehicle to help keep smallitems, like gloves and light
clothing in place during sharp turnsor quick stops An improperly stored cargo cover could be
and starts. thrown about the vehicle during a collision or
sudden maneuver.You or others could be
The net is not designed to retain these items during injured. If you remove the cover, always store it
off-road use. The netis not for larger, heavieritems. outside of the vehicle. When you put it back,
always be sure that itis securely reattached.

2-54
Cargo Tie Downs Luggage Carrier (Option)
There are four cargo tie
downs in the rear that allow
you to strap cargo in and
keep it from moving inside
the vehicle. If you try to carry something on top of your
vehicle that is longer or wider than theluggage
--
carrier like paneling,plywood, a mattress, and
--
so forth the wind can catchit as you drive
along. This can causeyou to lose control. What
you are carryingcould be violently torn off, and
this could causeyou or other drivers to have a
collision, and of course damage yourvehicle. You
may be able to carry something like this inside.
But, never carry something longer or wider tha
the luggage carrier on topof your vehicle.

The luggage carrier has slats, side rails and crossrails


attached to the roof to secure cargo.The adjustable tie
downs, at either endof the crossrails, shouldbe used to
secure loads to the luggage carrier.
Use GM accessory racks thatare compatible with your
luggage carrier for transporting sports equipment. These
are available through yourGM dealer.

2-55
rou can adjust the crossrails to handle loadsof various
sizes. Just loosen the slider knobs at each end of the NOTICE:
crossrail and move them to where youwant them. Make
sure both sides of the crossrails are even, then tighten Loading cargo thatweighs more than200 lbs.
the slider knobs.
(91 kg) onthe luggage carrier may damage your
Be sure the cargo is properlyloaded. Follow vehicle. When you carry large things, never let
these guidelines: them hang over the rear or the sides of your
Carrying small, heavy loads on the roof is vehicle. When loading cargo on the roof panel, be
not recommended. sure it restson the slats anddoes notscratch or
Tie the load to the tie down (ateither end of damage thevehicle.
the crossrails). When loading cargo directly on Put the cargo against the side rails and fasten it
the roof panel, usethe crossrails to keepthe load securely to the luggage carrier. Put the main
from shifting. weight as far forward asyou can andmove the
If you need to carry long items, move the crossrails rear crossrail forward as farpossible
as to keep
as far apart as possible. Tie the load to the tie downs the load from shifting.
provided. Also tie the load to the bumpers. Do not tie
the load so tightly thatthe crossrails or side rails Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
are damaged. loading your vehicle. For more informationon vehicle
capacity and loading, see “Loading Your Vehicle” in
the Index.
To prevent damage orloss of cargo as you’re driving,
check now and then to makesure the luggagecarrier and
cargo are still securelyfastened.

2-56
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
Rotate the front ashtray door down to open it.
I NOTICE:
I NOTICE:
~
Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand
while it is heating. If you do, it won’t be able to
back away from the heating element when it’s
Don’t put papers and other things that burn into ready. That can make it overload, damaging the
your ashtray.If you do, cigarettes or other lighter and the heating element.
smoking materialscould set them on fire
causing damage. Four-door vehicles havesmaller ashtrays inside the rear
doors. Press PUSH to turn the ashtrayaround for use.
To remove the front ashtray, pullthe bin upward. Sun Visors
To use the lighter, press it in all the way, and let go. To block out glare, you can swing downthe top and
When it’s ready,it will pop backby itself.
bottom visors (if your vehicle has one). You can also
swing the bottom visorfrom side-to-side. Your visors
may have an extension that can be pulled outfor
additional glare protection and a strap for holding small
items, such as maps.

2-57
Visor Vanity Mirror Accessory Power Outlets
Pull the sun visor down andlift the cover to expose the (If Equipped)
vanity mirror.
If you have accessory poweroutlets, you can plug in
Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirror auxiliary electrical equipment. The accessory power
outlets are located near thecenter of the vehicleon the
(If Equipped) lower part of the instrument panel.Just remove the plug
from the outlet and followthe proper installation
instructions that are included with anyelectrical
equipment you install.
These circuits are protectedby a fuseand have
maximum current levels.

I NOTICE:
When using the accessory power outlets,
maximum electrical load must not exceed
20 amps. Always turnoff any electrical
equipment when notin use. Leaving electrical
equipment on for extended periods will drain
Pull the sun visor down andlift the mirror cover to turn your battery.
on the lamps.

2-58
Sunroof (If Equipped) Press andrelease the rear side of the button in the mini
console to openthe sunroof. You can press the forward
side of the button to close the sunroof. Once the sunroof
is closed, press the forward side of the button to open
the sunroof to the vent position.
The sunroof is also equipped with a sunshade which you
can pull forward to block sun rays.

Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding


sunroof. To open or close your sunroof, the ignition or
RAP needs to beon. See “Retained Accessory Power”
in the Index.

2-59
Universal Transmitter(If Equipped)

Full-Size Console
This transmitter allowsyou to consolidate the functions
of up to three individual hand-held transmitters. It will
operate garage doors and gates,or with the accessory
package, other devices controlled by radio frequency such
Mini Console as home/offke lighting systems and security systems.
The transmitter will learn and transmitthe frequencies
of most current transmitters andis powered by your
. vehicle’s battery and charging system.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Your vehicle’s engine should be turnedoff while
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: programming the transmitter. Follow these steps to
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, program up to three channels:
and (2) this device must accept any interference 1 . If you have not previously programmeda universal
received, including interference that may cause channel, proceed to Step 2. Otherwise, hold down
undesired operation. the two outside buttons on the universal transmitter
This device complies with RSS-2 10 of Industry and until the red light begins to flash rapidly
Science Canada. Operation is subject to the following (approximately 20 seconds). Then release the
two conditions: (1) this device may not cause buttons. This procedure initializes the memory and
interference, and (2) this device must accept any erases any previous settings for all three channels.
interference, including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device. 2. Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter against the
bottom surface of the universal transmitter so that
Changes and modifications to this system by other than you can still see the red light.
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment. 3. Decide which one of the three channels you want to
program. Using both hands, pressthe hand-held
Programming the Transmitter transmitter button and the desired button onthe
universal transmitter.Continue to hold both buttons
Do not use the transmitter with any garage door opener through Step 4.
that does not havethe “stop and reverse” feature. This
includes any garage door opener model manufactured 4. Hold down both buttons until you see the red light
before April 1, 1982. on the universal transmitter flash rapidly. The rapid
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage flashing, which could take up to 90 seconds,
door you are programming! indicates that the universal transmitter has been
programmed. Release both buttonsonce the light
starts to flash rapidly.

2-61
If you havetrouble programming the universal Training a Garage Openerwith a “Rolling
transmitter, makesure that you havefollowed the
directions exactly as described and thatthe battery in the
hand-held transmitter is notdead. If you still cannot If you programmed the universal transmitter, but the
program it, rotate the hand-held transmitter end over end garage door will not open, and if your garage door opener
and try again. The universal transmitter may not work was manufactured after 1995, your garage door may have
with older garagedoor openers that do not meet current a security feature that changes the “code” of your garage
Federal Consumer SafetyStandards. If you cannot door opener every time it is opened or closed.
program the transmitter after repeated attempts, consult To determine if your garage door opener has this
your GM dealer. “rolling code” feature, press the appropriate button on
Be sure to keep the original hand-held transmitter the universal transmitterthat was programmed.If the
in case you need toerase and reprogramthe red light flashes rapidly for one to two seconds, then
universal transmitter. turns solid, your garage door opener has this feature.
To program a garage dooropener with the rollingcode
Operating the Transmitter feature, do the following:
Press and hold the appropriate button on the universal 1. Program your hand-held transmitter to the universal
transmitter. The redlight comes on while the signal is transmitter by following the steps provided under
being transmitted. “Programming the Transmitte?’ earlierin this section.
Note that theeffective transmission range of the 2. Remove the cover panel from the garage door opener
universal transmitter may differ from the hand-held receiver. It is located near the garage door opener motor.
transmitter and fromone channel to another.
3. Locate the training button on the garage door opener
receiver. The exact location and color will vary
among brands.

2-62
4. Press the training button on the garage door opener Erasing Channels
receiver for one to two seconds.
To erase all three programmed channels, hold down the
5 . Return to your vehicle and press the programmed two outside buttons until the redlight begins to flash.
button on the universal transmitter until the red light Individual channels cannot be erased, but can be
flashes rapidly (about two seconds). reprogrammed using theprocedure for programming the
6. Release the button, then press it again to confirm it transmitter explained earlier.
was programmed to the garage door opener receiver.
Accessories
You may now use either the universal transmitter or the
Accessories for the universal transmitter are available
hand-held transmitter to open your garage door. If you
from the manufacturer of the unit. If you would like
still have difficulty in programming andrequire
additional information, please call 1-800-355-35 15.
assistance, please call 1-800-355-35 15.

2-63
Instrument Panel

A. Air Vents E. Audio System J. RearLiftgate Release


B. Instrument Cluster E Auxiliary Power Outlets K. Rear Window Washermiper
C. Electronic Transfer Case G . Rear Window Defogger L. Brake Release
(If Equipped) H. Comfort Controls M. Fog Lamps
D. Glove Box I. Ashtray N. Lamp Controls
2-64
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument cluster is designed to let you knowat a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how fast you’re
going, about how much fuel you’ve used, andmany other things you’ll needto know to drive safely and economically.

Standard Cluster

2-65
2-66
Speedometer and Odometer Each tachometer has a different limit depending on the
powertrain in your vehicle.The tachometer has three
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles areas: normal operating range, red warning range and
per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (kmh). red danger range.
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has been The normal operating range shows your engine speed
driven, in either miles (used inthe United States) or during normal driving conditions. For example, when
kilometers (used in Canada). the needle points to 2, it means the engine is running at
You may wonder what happensif your vehicle needsa 2,000 revolutions per minute (rpm).The tachometer
new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to the needle will vary all the time that the engine is running.
mileage total of the old odometer, then it must be. But if The shaded red warning rangetells you that yourengine
it can’t, then it’s set at zero, and a label must be put on speed is reaching its upper limits. Don’t drive very long
the driver’s door to show the old mileage reading when with the tachometer in the red warning range. If you
the new odometer was installed. have a manual transmission, shift to a higher gear as
soon aspossible. If you have an automatic transmission,
Wip Odometer
lift yourfoot off the accelerator pedal.
The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has
been driven since you last setthe trip odometer to zero. The solid red danger rangetells you that yourengine
speed is at its upper limits. You should immediately
To view the trip odometer, press the button near the shift to ahigher gear,or lift your foot off the
readout. To reset the trip odometer, hold the button until accelerator pedal.
it resets.
Tachometer (If Equipped)
The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions
I NOTICE:
per minute (rpm). Do not operate the engine with the tachometer in
the red range, or engine damage will occur.
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators When one of the warning lights comes on and stayson
when you are driving, or whenone of the gages shows
This part describes the warning lights and gages that there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you what to do about it. Please followthis manual’s advice.
locate them. Waiting to do repairs can be costly-- and even
Warning lights and gages cansignal that something is dangerous. So please getto know your warninglights
wrong before it becomesserious enough to cause an and gages.They’re a bighelp.
expensive repairor replacement. Paying attentionto
your warning lights and gagescould also save you or Safety Belt Reminder Light
others from injury. When the keyis turned to RUN or START, a chime will
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a come on for about eight seconds to remind people to
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions.As you fasten their safety belts, unlessthe driver’s safety belt is
will see in the details on the next few pages, some already buckled.
warning lights come on briefly whenyou start the The safety belt light will
engine just to let you know they’re working.If you are also come on and stay on
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed for about 20 seconds,
when this happens. then it will flashfor about
Gages canindicate when there may be oris a problem 55 seconds. If the driver’s
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and belt is already buckled,
warning lights work togetherto let you know when neither thechime nor the
there’s a problem with your vehicle. light willcome on.

2-68
Air Bag Readiness Light Charging System Indicator Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument The charging system light
panel, which shows theair bag symbol. The system will come on briefly when
checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions. you turn on the ignition,
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. The but the engine is not
system check includes theair bag sensors, the air bag running, as a check to
module, the wiring and the diagnostic module. For more show you it is working.
information on theair bag system, see “Air Bag” in
the Index.
It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays
This light will come on
on, or comes on whileyou are driving, you may have a
when you start your engine,
problem with the charging system.It could indicate that
and it will flash for a few
you have problems with a generator drive belt, or
seconds. Then the light
another electrical problem. Have it checked right away.
should go out.This means
Driving while this light is on could drain your battery.
the system is ready.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be
certain to turn off all youraccessories, such as the radio
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the and air conditioner.
engine or comes on when you are driving, your air bag
system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
The air bag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, haveit fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.

2-69
Vo1’-- - --* Gage You can only drivefor a short time with the reading in
either warning zone.If you must drive, turn off all
I When your engine is not unnecessary accessories.
running, but theignition is
Readings in either warning zoneindicate a possible
on (inRUN), this gage
problem in theelectrical system. Have the vehicle
shows your battery’sstate of
serviced as soon as possible.
charge in DC volts.
Shift Light
You have the shiftlight if
you have a manual
transmission. This light
comes on very brieflyas a
When the engine is running, the gage shows the bulb check when you start
condition of the chargingsystem. Readings betweenthe SHIFT the engine.
low and high warning zonesindicate the normal
operating range.
Shifting when the indicator light is on will help youget
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a the bestfuel economy. See “Shift Light” in the Index.
large number of electrical accessories are operating in
the vehicle andthe engine is leftat an idle for an
extended period.This condition is normal since the
charging system is not able to provide full power at
engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this
condition should correct itself as higherengine speeds
allow the charging system tocreate maximum power.

2-70
Brake System Warning Light If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully.You may notice thatthe pedal is
When the ignition is on, the brake system warninglight harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the floor.
will come on when you set your parlung brake. The light It may take longerto stop. If the light is still on, have the
will stay onif your parking brake doesn’t release fully. vehicle towed for service. (See “Towing Your Vehicle”
If it stays on after your parking brake
is fully released, it in the Index.)
means youhave a brake problem.
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake systemis divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working,the other part can
still work and stop you.For good braking, though, you
’F--A CAUTl IN:
need both parts working well.
Your brake system may not be working properly
If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake if the brake system warning lightis on. Driving
problem. Have your brake system inspected right away. with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident.If the lightis still on after you’ve
This light should come pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have
on briefly when you turn

(0)(8>
BRAKE
the ignition key toRUN. If
it doesn’t come on then,
have it fixed so it will be
the vehicle towed for service.

ready to warn you if there’s


a problem.

2-71
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
With the anti-lock brake This gage shows the engine
system, this light willcome coolant temperature.If the
on when you start your gage pointer movesinto
engine and may stay the red area, your engineis
on for several seconds. too hot!
That’s normal.

If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving,


your vehicle needs service.If the regular brake system
warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but you
don’t have anti-lock brakes.If the regular brake system It means that your engine coolant has overheated. you
If
warning light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock brakes have been operating your vehicle under normal driving
and there’s a problem with your regular brakes. See conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your
“Brake System Warning Light”earlier in this section. vehicle and turn off the engine as soonas possible.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should come In “Problems on the Road,” this manual show you what
on briefly when you turn the ignition keyto RUN. If the to do. See “Engine Overheating’’ in the Index.
light doesn’t come onthen, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.

2-72
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(Service
Engir light) NOTICE:
Your vehicle is equipped If you keep driving your vehicle with this light
with a computer which on, aftera while, your emission controls may not
SERVICE monitors operation of the work as well, your fuel economy may not as be
ENGINE fuel, ignition and emission
good and your engine may not run as smoothly.
control systems.
SOON This could leadto costly repairs that may not be
covered by your warranty.

This system is called OBD I1 (On-Board This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intendedto working, when the ignition ison and the engine is not
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the running. If the light doesn’t come on, haveit repaired.
life of the vehicle, helpingto produce a cleaner This light will also come on during a malfunction in one
environment. The SERVICE ENGINE SOON light of two ways:
comes on to indicate that there is a problem andservice
is required. Malfunctions often willbe indicated by 0 Light Flashing-- A misfire condition has been
the system beforeany problem is apparent. This may detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This may damage the emission control system on your
system is also designed to assist your service technician vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis
in correctly diagnosing any malfunction. and service maybe required.
0 Light On Steady -- An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and
service may be required.

2-73
If the LightIs Flashing If the LightIs On Steady
The following may prevent moreserious damage to You may be able to correct the emission system
your vehicle: malfunction by considering the following:
Reducing vehicle speed. Did you recentlyput fuel into your vehicle?
0 Avoidinghard accelerations. If so, reinstall the fuel cap, makingsure to fully install
Avoiding steep uphill grades. the cap.The diagnostic system candetermine if the fuel
cap has been leftoff or improperly installed. A loose or
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the
cargo being hauledas soon as itis possible. atmosphere. A few driving trips with thecap properly
“If
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see installed should turnthe light off.
the Light Is On Steady” following. Did youjust drive througha deep puddle of water?
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so, If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle. will usuallybe corrected when the electrical system
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light
Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps,and drive the vehicle to your
dealer or qualified service center for service.

2-74
Have you recently changed brands of fu.el? Engine Oil Pressure Gage
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel (see The oil pressure gage shows
“Fuel” in the Index). Poor fuel quality will cause your the engine oil pressure in
engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You may psi (pounds per square inch)
notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when you when the engine is running.
put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the light
to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least one
full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off. Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in kPa (kilopascals).
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off, Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
have your dealer or qualified service center check the temperature and oil viscosity, butreadings above the
vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that mayhave developed.

2-75
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a Security Warning Light
dangerously low oil level or other problems causing low
oil pressure. This light will come on
briefly when you turn the
key toward START.The
SECURITY light will stay on until the
engine starts.
Don’t keep drivingif the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire.You or others could be burned. If the light flashes, the Passlocksystem has entered a
Check your oil as soon as possible and have your tamper mode. If the vehicle fails to start, see “Passlock”
vehicle serviced. in the Index.
If the light comes on continuously while driving and
stays on, there may be a problem with the Passlock

I NOTICE: system. Your vehicle will not be protected bv Passlock,


and you should see your dealer.

Damage to yourengine from neglected oil


problems can becostly and is not covered by
your warranty.

2-76
Service 4WD Light Check Gages Light
This light should come on The CHECK GAGES light
briefly when you turn on the will come on briefly when
ignition, as acheck to show CHECK you are starting the engine.
SERVICE you it is working.
4WD GAGES
~~~ ~ ~

The SERVICE 4WD light comes on to indicate that If the light comes on and stays on while you aredriving,
there may be a problem with the drive system and check your coolant temperature and engine oil pressure
service is required. Malfunctions can be indicated by the gages to see if they are in the warning zones.
system before any problem is apparent, which may
prevent serious damage to the vehicle. This system is Gate Ajar Light
also designed to assist your service technician in
correctly diagnosing a malfunction. This light will come on
-

briefly when you are


starting the engine.
GATE
I AJAR

If it stays on, your liftgate is ajar.Try closing the liftgate


again. Never drive with the liftgate even partially open.

2-77
Fuel Gage The gage moves a little whenyou turn a corner or
speed up.
When the ignitionis on,
the fuel gage tells you The gage doesn’t go back to EMPTY (E) when you
turn off the ignition.
about how much fuel you
have remaining. Low Fuel Light
This light comes on when
FUELONLY
the fuel tank is low on fuel.
LOW
FUEL
Here are four things that some owners
ask about. None
of these show a problem with your fuel gage:
To turn it off, add fuelto the fuel tank. See “Fuel” in
At the gas station, the gas pumpshuts off before the the Index.
gage reads FULL(F).
It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacityto fill
the tank.

2-78
Section 3 Cornfo-t Controls and Audio Systems

In this section, you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle. Be
sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle.

3-2 Comfort Controls 3-15 AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and
3-2 Standard Climate Control System Automatic ToneControl (If Equipped)
3-3 Electronic Climate Control (If Equipped) 3-20 AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and
3-7 Air Conditioning Automatic ToneControl (If Equipped)
3-7 Heating 3-24 Remote Cassette Tape Player (If Equipped)
3-7 Ventilation System 3-26 Theft-Deterrent Feature (If Equipped)
3-8 Defogging and Defrosting 3-28 Understanding Radio Reception
3- 10 Audio Systems 3-28 Tips About Your Audio System
3- 10 Setting the Clock for Systems without 3-29 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
Automatic Tone Control 3-30 Care of Your Compact Discs
3-10 Setting the Clock for Systems with Automatic 3-30 Care of Your Compact DiscPlayer
Tone Control 3-30 Fixed Mast Antenna
3- 10 AM-FM Stereo
3-12 AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
(If Equipped)
Comfort Controls Temperature Knob
With this system, you can control the heating, cooling The middle knobon the control panel lets you selectthe
and ventilation in your vehicle. relative temperature of the air flowing into the passenger
area of your vehicle. Move theknob to the right toward
Standard Climate Control System the red areafor warmer air. Move theknob to the left
toward the blue areafor cooler air.
Mode Knob
The right knob on the control panel allows you to
choose the directionof air delivery.
OFF: This setting turns the systemoff. Some outside air
will still enter the vehicle whenever the vehicle
is
moving forward.
MAX A/C: This setting provides maximum cooling
I' II with the least amountof work. MAX A/C recirculates
much of the air inside your vehicleso it cools quickly.
This setting directs most of the air through the
Fan Control instrument panel vents anda small amount throughthe
The knob on the left sideof the heating system control floor vents.
panel controls the fan speed.To increase airflow, move A/C: This setting cools the air entering your vehicle and
the knob to the right. To decrease airflow, moveit to directs most of the air through the instrument panel
the left. vents and a small amount through the floor vents.

3-2
+e Electronic Climate Control System
+fl BI-LEVEL A / C : This setting cools the air
(-- Equipped)
entering your vehicle anddirects it through the heater
floor outlets as well as the instrument panel outlets.
+0

fl VENT This setting directs most of the air through


the instrument paneloutlets and a small amount through
the floor outlets. The air conditioning compressor is not
working when VENT is selected.
+
HEATER:’
0
This setting directs most of the
warmed air through the heaterfloor outlets and some air
through the windshield defroster outlets.
w. BLEND: Airflow
+ ’ is divided equally between the
heater floor outlet and the windshield defroster outlets.
Fan Control
DEFROST: This setting directs most air through
the windshield defroster outlets and some through the The knob on the left sideof the electronic climate control
heater (floor) outlets. panel controls the fan speed. To manually increase airflow,
move the knob to the right.To manually decrease aifflow,
move it to the left.
OFF: If the knob isin OFF, outside air will still enter
on the position of
the vehicle, and will be directed based
the mode knob.
AUTO: If the knob isin AUTO, the fan speed will vary
as the system maintains the selected temperature.

3-3
Temperature Knob -
Mode Knob Automatic Operation
The middle knob on the control panel letsyou select the The right knobon the control panel allowsyou to
desired air temperature in your vehicle.This knob will choose the direction ofair delivery. When the system is
allow you to adjust theinterior air temperature set for automatic operation, sensors will control theair
independently of the function knob setting. Move the delivery mode. Air will come primarily from the floor or
knob to the right toward82 for warmer air. Move the instrument panel outlets, with some air directed to the
knob to the left toward66 for cooler air. windshield to prevent fogging.
Full Hot: If you turn the temperature knob past82°F When the system isin AUTO mode, theair conditioning
(28”C), the system will go into the “full hot” mode. The light will turn on, and the recirculation and outsideair
system will remain at that maximum heating setting and lights turn off. With the system in full auto control (both
the fan will blowat the speed the fan knob is setto. If the fan and mode knobs in AUTO), you still have the
the fan is in AUTO, it will runat full speed. ability to override any function. However, continually
Full Cold: If you turn the temperature knob past66°F overriding the outsideair or the A/C compressor will
(1 9”C), the system will go into the “full cold” mode.
limit the abilityof the system to cool the
The system will remain at that maximum coolingsetting vehicle quickly.
and the fan will blow at the speed the fan knob is set to. If you push a button for a function which is not
If the fan isin AUTO, it will run at full speed. available, the light next to that button will flash three
Choosing either maximum setting will not cause the times to alert you that it’s not available.
system to heat or cool any faster. To find your comfort zone, start with the74°F (23°C)
setting and allow about20 minutes for the systemto
adjust the temperature if necessary.

3-4
With the automatic setting, the air conditioning Be careful not to put anything overthe solar sensor
compressor automatically cycles when neededto cool located around the center of the instrument panel.
the air. Incold weather, whenthe system senses the need This sensor is used bythe automatic system to
for heat, the airflow will be directed out the floor regulate temperature.
outlets. As the interior temperature approaches a desired
setting, the blower speed willdecrease. To maintain -
Mode Knob Manual Operation
interior comfort, the airflow willadjust between the The right knob on the control panel allows youto
instrument panel air outlets and floor outlets. On bright choose the direction of air delivery.
sunny days incool weather, the airflow maycome out of
the air conditioning and floor outlets (bi-level mode) to You can choose to set the climate control system
maintain comfort and prevent stuffiness. operations yourself, or let the system workfor you
by placing the system in AUTO mode. See “Mode
To avoid blowingcold air in cold weather, the system
will delay turning on the fan until warm air is available.
The length of delay depends on the outside air
+.
Knob - Automatic Operation” earlier in this section.
fl PANEL: This setting directs most of the air
temperature, engine coolant temperature or the time through the instrument paneloutlets and a small amount
since the engine was last started. As the coolant warms
up, the blower fan speed will graduallyincrease and air
will flow from the heater outlets, with some airflow to
+.
through thefloor outlets.
+H BI-LEVEL: Air is delivered through the heater
the windshield to prevent fogging under most floor outlets as well as the instrument panel outlets.
normal conditions. +’ e
HEATER: This setting directs most of the
If your vehicle is sitting out on a warm day and you warmed air throughthe heater floor outlets and some
have the fanset on AUTO, the air will first flow out of air throughthe windshield defroster outlets.
the floor air outlets for a few seconds. That is normal.
This is to expel hot air from the air outlets. As the air is
cooled, the airflow will move throughthe air
conditioning outlets.

3-5
w.
+HBLEND: Airflow is divided equally between the
RECIRCULATION may be selectedwith the fan control
in OFF to limit odors, outsideair and dust from entering
heater flooroutlet and the windshield defroster outlets. your vehicle.
The air conditioningcompressor may run to dehumidify Pressing the RECIRCULATION buttonwill cancel the
the air to prevent window fogging. OUTSIDE AIR button.
DEFROST This setting directs most air through A/C: Press this button to turn the air conditioning
the windshield defrosteroutlets and some throughthe on and off. The system will cool and dehumidify theair
heater outlets. The air conditioning compressor may run inside the vehiclewhen the A/C light is on.
to dehumidify the air to prevent window fogging.
Air conditioning will be automatically disabled when
a OUTSIDE AIR:Press this button toforce the
system to use outside air. Pressit again to closeoff the
the outside temperaturedrops below a level which air
conditioning is ineffective.
outside air.
Remember thatin order for the automatic systemto perform
Pressing the OUTSIDE AIR buttonwill cancel the well, it needs A/C to provide cooling performance.
RECIRCULATION button.
RECIRCULATION: Press this button to limit
the amountof fresh airentering your vehicle.This is
helpful when you are trying to limit odors entering your
vehicle. In the AUTO mode, thesystem will use
recirculation as necessaryto cool the air. Pressing the
recirculation button will change the operation toa
manual mode and theair will recirculate non-stop. Press
this button again to turn off the recirculation feature.

3-6
Air Conditioning Heating
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot The heater works bestif you keep your windows closed
inside air escape. This reduces the timeit takes for your while using it. On cold days,use HEATER with the
vehicle to cool down. Then keep your windows closed temperature knob turnedto the right. BLEND is useful
for the air conditioner to work its best. in cool weather whenyou have fog or ice on the
windshield or side windows.
For quick cool-down on very hot days, use MAX A/C
with the temperature knob turnedto the left. This setting If you use the optional engine coolant heater before
should be used to keep odors and/or dust from entering starting your engine, your heating system will produce
the vehicle. For normal cooling on hot days, use A/C warmer air faster to heat the passenger compartmentin
with the temperature knob turnedto the left. cold weather. See “Engine Coolant Heater” in the Index
On vehicles equipped with the Electronic Climate Ventilation System
Control system, this same performance can be achieved
as long as the A/C is enabled and the outside
air button For mild outside temperatures whenlittle heating or
is not active. cooling is needed, useVENT to direct outside air
through your vehicle. Airflow is through the instrument
On cool but sunny days, useBI-LEVEL A/C to deliver panel outlets.
warm air tothe floor and cooler air to the instrument
panel outlets. Your vehicle’s ventilation system supplies outsideair to
the inside of your vehicle whenit is moving. When the
When the air conditioner is on, you may sometimes vehicle is not moving, you can get outside air to flow
notice slight changes in your vehicle’sengine speed and through by selecting any mode and any fan speed.
power. This is normal becausethe system is designed
to cycle the compressor on and off to keep the
desired temperature.

3-7
Ventilation Tips
Keep the hood and front air inlet free
of ice, snow or
any other obstruction (suchas leaves). The heater
and defroster will work
far better, reducing the
chance of fogging the inside of your windows.
When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, move the
fan controlto high for a few moments before driving
off. This helps clear the intake ducts
of snow and
moisture, and reduces the chance of fogging the
inside of your windows.
Keep the air path under the front seats clear of
objects. This helps air to circulate throughout
your vehicle.
You will find air outlets inthe center and on the sides
of Defogging and Defrosting
your instrument panel.
On cool, humid days, useBLEND to keep the
You can direct the airflow side-to-sideby rotating the windshield and side windows clear.
thumbwheel located in the center of the vent. The vent
can be tilted up and down also.To control the amountof Use DEFROST to remove fog or ice from the
airflow through the outlets, rotate the thumbwheel windshield quickly in extreme humid or cold conditions.
below the vent. Turn the temperature knob to the right and move the fan
control toward high.

3-8
Rear Window Defogger (If Equipped) The rear window defogger will stayon for five to seven
- If your vehicle hasthis
minutes, then turnoff. If you need additional warming
time, turn it on again. You can turn the defoggeroff at
option, the rear window any timeby pressing the button.
will have lines that warm
the glass.
Do not attach a temporary vehiclelicense, tape or decals
across the defogger grid on the rear window.

NOTICE:
Don’t use a razor bladeor something else sharp
on the insideof the rear window.If you do, you
For I - - t results, clear the window ofas much snow or could cut or damage the warming grid, and the
ice as possible before using therear window defogger. repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
To turn on the rear window defogger, find the switch
marked REAR with the defog symbol on the lower right
corner of your climate control system. Press the button
until the light in the switchcomes on, then release it. It
will only work if the ignition switch is turnedto RUN.
If your vehicle is equipped with the optional heated
outside rearview mirrors, therear window defogger
button will activate the rear window defogger and the
heated outside rearviewmirrors.

3-9
Audio Systems AM-FM.Stereo
Your Delco Electronics audio system has been designed
to operate easily andgive years of listening pleasure.
You will get the most enjoymentout of it if you acquaint
yourself with it first. Findout what your Delco
Electronics system can do and how to operate all its
controls, to be sure you’re getting the most outof the
advanced engineering that went into it.
Setting the Clockfor Systems without
Automatic Tone Control
Press SET. Withinfive seconds, press and hold the
SEEK right arrow untilthe correct minute appears on
the display. Press and hold the
SEEK left arrow until the Playing the Radio
correct hour appears on the display. VOLUME: This knob turns the systemon and off and
controls the volume.To increase volumeand turn the
Setting the Clockfor Systems with radio on, turn the knob
to the right. Turn it to the leftto
Automatic Tone Control decrease volume.
Press and holdHR until the correct hour appears on the RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
display. Press and holdMN until the correct minute pressing the recall knob. When the radio is playing,
appears on the display.To display the clock with the press this knobto recall the station frequency.
ignition off, pressRECALL or HR/MN and the time
will be displayedfor a few seconds. There is an initial
two-second delay before the clock goes into the
time-set mode.

3-10
Finding a Station 3. Tune in the desired station.
AM-FM: Press the lower knob to switch betweenAM 4. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
and FM. The display shows yourselection. 5. Press and hold one of the four pushbuttons within
TUNE: Turn the lower knob to tune in radio stations. five seconds. Whenever you press that numbered
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher button, the station you set will return.
station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower 6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
station and stay there. In addition to the four stations already set, up to three
SCAN: Press both SEEK buttons to listen to a few more stations may be preset on each bandby pressing
seconds of each radio station. SCAN will light up onthe two adjoining buttons at the same time. Just:
display. Press the right arrow to tune in the next higher 1. Tune in the desired station.
station and press the left arrow to tune to the next lower
station. Press VOLUME or both SEEK buttons to 2. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
stop scanning. 3. Press two adjoining buttons at the same time, within
PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons let five seconds. Whenever you press thesame two
you return to yourfavorite stations. You can set up to buttons, the station you set will return.
14 stations (seven AM and seven FM).Just: 4. Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.

3-11
Setting theTone AM-FM Stereo with CassetteTape Player
BASS: Slide this lever up or down to increase or (If Equipped)
decrease bass.
TREB: Slide this lever up or down to increase or
decrease treble. If a station is weakor noisy, you may
want to decrease thetreble.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Turn the control behind the upper knobto move
the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Turn the control behind the lower knobto move
the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle
position balances thesound between the speakers. Playing the Radio
VOLUME: This knob turns the systemon and off and
controls the volume. To increase volume and turn the
radio on, turn the knob to the right. Turn it to thetoleft
decrease volume.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing this knob. When the radio is playing, pressthis
knob to recall the station frequency.

3-12
Finding a Station In addition to the four stations already set, up to three
more stations may be preset on each band by pressing
AM-FM: Press the lowerknob to switch between AM,
two adjoining buttonsat the same time.Just:
FMl and FM2.
I . Tune in the desired station.
TUNE: Turn the lower knob to tune in radiostations.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tuneto the next higher 2. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
station and the left arrowto tune to the next lower 3. Press two adjoining buttons at the same time, within
station and stay there. five seconds. Whenever you press the same two
buttons, the stationyou set will return.
PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons let
You can set up to
you return to your favorite stations. 4. Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons.
2 1 stations (sevenA M , seven FM 1 and seven FM2).Just: P.SCAN: Press both SEEK buttons to scan through each
1. Turn the radio on. of your preset stations. The system will scan through
and play each preset station stored on your pushbuttons
2 . Press AM-FMto select the band.
for a few seconds. Presseither SEEK button or
3. Tune in the desired station. RECALL to stop scanning through the presetstations.
4. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.) Setting the Tone
5. Press one of the four pushbuttons within five BASS: Slide this lever up or down to increase or
seconds. Whenever you press that numbered button, decrease bass.
the station you set will return.
TREB: Slide this lever up or down to increase or
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. decrease treble. If a station is weakor noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.

3-13
Adjusting the Speakers FWD: Press the SEEK right arrowto advance the
BAL: Turn the control behind the upper knobto move cassette tape. Press the SEEK left arrow
to stop
the sound to the leftor right speakers. The middle forwarding the tape.
position balances the sound between the speakers. RECALL: Press this knob to switch tape
sides.
FADE: Turn the control behindthe lower knob to move EJECT Press this button to remove the tape orstop the
the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle tape and playthe radio.
position balances the sound between the speakers,
CLN: If this message appearson the display, the
Playing a Cassette Tape cassette tape player needsto be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
Your tape player is builtto work best with tapes thatare prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of
30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than Your Cassette Tape Player”in the Index. Afteryou clean
that are so thin they may not work well in this player. the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to
Once the tapeis playing, use the knobsfor VOLUME, reset the CLN indicator.The radio will display--- to
BAL FADE, BASS and TREB just as you do for show the indicator was reset.
the radio.
REV: Press the SEEK left arrowto reverse the cassette
tape. Press the SEEK right arrow
to stop reversing
the tape.

3-14
AM-FM Stereo with CassetteTape and SCV Your system has a feature called
Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped) Speed-Compensated-Volume (SCV). With SCV, your
audio system adjusts automaticallyto make up for road
and wind noise as you drive.Set the volume at the
desired level. Move the control ring behind the upper
SCV. Then, as you drive,
knob to the right to adjust the
SCV automatically increases thevolume, as necessary,
to overcome noise at any particularspeed. The volume
level should always sound the same to youas you drive.
If you don’t want to useSCV, turn the control all the
way down. Each notch on the control ring allowsfor
more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press this button to switch betweenAM, FMl
Playing the Radio and FM2. The display will show your selection.
PWR-VOL: Press this knobto turn the system on and TUNE: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn it to
off. To increase volume, turn the knob to the right. Turn choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored
it to the left to decreasevolume. The knob is capable of position when you’re not using it.
being rotated continuously.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition offby station and the left arrowto tune to the nextlower
pressing this button. When the radio is playing, press station and stay there.The sound will mute
this button to recall the station frequency. while seeking.

3-15
SCAN: Press and hold SEEK for two seconds until P. SCAN: The preset scan button letsyou scan through
SCAN appearson the display. SCAN allowsyou to your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons. Select
listen to stations for afew seconds. The receiver will either the AM, FM 1 or FM2 mode and then press
continue to scan and momentarily stopat each station P, SCAN. It will scan through each station storedon
until you press the button again. The sound will mute your pushbuttons and stop for afew seconds before
while scanning. continuing to scan through all ofthe pushbuttons. Press
P. SCAN again or oneof the pushbuttons to stop
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to yourfavorite stations. You can set up to scanning to listento a specific preset station. P. SCAN
will light up on the display whilein this mode. If one of
18 stations (six AM, six FM I and six FM2). Just:
the stations stored on a pushbutton is too weak for the
1. Turn the radio on. location you are in, the radio display will show the
2. Press AM-FM to select the band. channel number (PI -P6) for several seconds before
advancing to the next preset station.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO TONE to select the setting you prefer. Setting theTone
5. Press and hold oneof the six pushbuttons.The sound BASS: Press lightly onthis knob to releaseit from its
will mute. When it returns, release the button. stored position. Turn the knob the to right to increase
Whenever you press that numbered button, the bass and to the left to decrease bass. When the BASS
station you set will return and the tone you selected control is rotated, the AUTO TONE displaywill
will be automatically selected for that button. go blank.
6. Repeat the stepsfor each pushbutton.

3-16
TREB: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its Adjusting the Speakers
stored position. Turn the knob to the right to increase BAL: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
treble and to the left to decrease treble. When the TREB the right to adjust
stored position. Turn the control to
control is rotated, the AUTOTONE display will go sound to the right speakers andto the left to adjust
blank. If a station is weak or noisy, you may wantto sound to the left speakers.The middle position balances
decrease the treble. the sound between the speakers.
Push these knobs backinto their stored positions when FADE: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
you’re not usingthem. to adjust the
stored position. Turn the control to the right
AUTO TONE: Press this button to selectamong the six sound to the front speakers andto the left for the rear
preset equalization settings and tailor the sound the
to speakers. The middle position balances the sound
music or voice being heard. Each time you press the between the speakers.
button, the selectionwill switch to oneof the preset Push theseknobs back into their stored positionswhen
settings of CLASSIC, NEWS, ROCK, POP, C/W you’re not usingthem.
(Country/Western)or JAZZ. To return to the manual
mode, press and release this button until the AUTO Playing a CassetteTape
TONE display goes blank. This will return the tone
adjustment to the BASS and TREBcontrols. If a BASS Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
or TREB control is rotated, the AUTO TONE display 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than
will go blank. Use PUSHBUTTONS to program that are so thin they may not work well in this player.
AUTO TONE. To load a cassette tape with the ignition off, press
EJECT or RECALL. Then, insert the cassette tape.
If the ignition ison but the radio is off, the tapewill
begin playing.

3-17
Once the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUTO TONE, REV (4): Press this button to rapidly reverse the tape to
BAL, FADE, BASS and TREBcontrols just as you do the beginningof the cassette or until you press REV
for the radio. Thetape symbol and a direction arrow will again. The radio will play the last selected station while
be on the display whenevera tape is being played. reversing the tape.The tape direction arrowwill blink
Anytime a tape is inserted, the top side is selected for during the reverse operation.
play first. 00 (5): Press this buttonto reduce cassette tape noise.
The player automaticallysenses if the cassette tape is The double-D symbol will appear on the display while
metal or Cr02 and adjusts for best playback sound. the player is in this mode.
For metal tapes, the double-D symbol willappear on Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license
the display.
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
PREV (1): Press the PREV button or the SEEK left and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
arrow to searchfor the previous selection. A minimum Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
three-second blank gap is required for the player tostop
FWD (6): Press this buttonto rapidly forward thetape
at the beginning of the selection. The tape direction to the end of the cassette or until you press FWD again.
arrow will blink during the SEEKoperation. The radio will play the last selected station while
PROG (2): Press this button to switch from one side of forwarding the tape.The tape direction arrowwill blink
the tape tothe other. during the forward operation.
NEXT (3): Press the NEXT buttonor the SEEK right AM-FM: Press this button to switch froma tape to
arrow to search for the next selection. A minimum the radio.
three-second blank gap is required for the player to stop
at the beginningof the selection. The tape direction
arrow will blink during the SEEKoperation. The sound
will mute while searchingfor the next selection.

3-18
TAPE AUX: Press this button to returnto the tape CD Adapter Kits
player when playing the radio. The lighted arrow will
It is possible to usea CD adapter kit with your cassette
appear and show the direction of play when a tape is in
tape player after activating the bypass feature on your
the active mode.
tape player.
EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape. The radio To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:
will now play.EJECT can be used with either the
ignition or radio off. Toload a cassette tape with the I . Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
ignition or radio off, press EJECT before loading 2. Turn the radio off.
the cassette.
3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five
CLN: If this message appears on the display, the seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play for two seconds, indicating the feature is active.
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of 4. Insert the adapter while the tape symbol is flashing.
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean It will power up theradio and begin playing.
the player,press and hold EJECT for fiveseconds to This override routine will remain active until EJECT
reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to is pressed.
show the indicator was reset.

3-19
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player SCV Your system has a feature called
and AutomaticTone Control (If Equipped) Speed-Compensated-Volume (SCV). With SCV, your
audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road
and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume at the
desired level. Move the control ring behind the upper
knob to the right to adjust the SCV. Then, as you drive,
SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary,
to overcome noise at any particular speed. The volume
level should always sound the sameto you as you drive.
If you don’t wantto use SCV, turn the control all the
way down. Each notchon the control ring allows for
more volume compensation atfaster vehicle speeds.
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1
Playing the Radio and FM2. The display will show your selection.
PWR-VOL: Press this knobto turn the system on and TUNE: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn it to
off. To increase volume, turnthis knob to the right. Turn choose radio stations. Push the knob back intoits stored
it to the left to decrease volume. The knobis capable of position when you’re not usingit.
rotating continuously.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower
pressing this button. When the radio is playing, press station and stay there.The sound will mute
this button to recall the station frequency. while seeking.

3-20
SCAN: Press and holdSEEK for two seconds until P.SCAN: The preset scan button letsyou scan through
SCAN appears on the display. SCAN allowsyou to your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons. Select
listen to stations for a few seconds. The receiver will either the AM, FM I or FM2 mode and then press
continue to scan and momentarily stop at each station P.SCAN. It will scan through each station storedon
until you press the buttonagain. The sound will mute your pushbuttons and stop for a few seconds before
while scanning. continuing to scan through allof the pushbuttons. Press
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let P.SCAN again or oneof the pushbuttons to stop
you return to yourfavorite stations. You can set up to scanning to listen toa specific stored station. P.SCAN
18 stations (six AM, six FMl and six FM2). Just: will light up on the display while in this mode. If one of
the stations storedon a pushbutton is too weakfor the
1. Turn the radio on. location you are in, the radio displaywill show the
2. Press AM-FM to select the band. channel number (PI -P6) for several seconds before
advancing to the next preset station.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO TONEto select the setting you prefer. Setting the Tone
5 . Press and holdone of the six pushbuttons.The sound
BASS: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
will mute. When it returns, release the button. stored position. Turn theknob to the right to increase
Whenever you press thatnumbered button, the bass and to the leftto decrease bass. When the BASS
station you set will return and the toneyou selected control is rotated, the AUTO TONE display will
will be automatically selectedfor that button. go blank.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

3-21
TREB: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its Adjusting the Speakers
stored position. Turnthe knob to the right to increase
BAL: Press lightly on this knob torelease it from its
treble and tothe left to decrease treble. When the TREB
stored position. Turn the control the
to right to adjust
control is rotated, the AUTOTONE display will go
sound to the right speakers and to the left to adjust
blank. If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to sound to the leftspeakers. The middle position balances
decrease the treble. the sound between thespeakers.
Push these knobsback into their stored positions when FADE: Press lightly on this knob to releaseit from its
you’re not using them. stored position. Turn the controlto the right to adjust the
AUTO TONE: Press this button to select among the six sound to the front speakers andto the left for the rear
preset equalization settings and tailor the sound to the speakers. The middle positionbalances the sound
music or voice being heard. Each time you press the between the speakers.
button, the selection will switch to one of the preset
Push these knobs backinto their stored positions when
settings of CLASSIC, NEWS, ROCK,POP, C/W you’re not using them.
(Country/Western) or JAZZ. To return to the manual
mode, press and releasethis button until the AUTO Playing a Compact Disc
TONE display goes blank.This will return the tone
adjustment to the BASS and TREB controls.If a BASS PWR: Press this knob to turnthe system on.
or TREB control is rotated, the AUTO TONE display (Please note thatyou can also turn the systemon when
will go blank. Use PUSHBUTTONSto program you insert a compact disc into the player with the
AUTO TONE. ignition on.)
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in. Wait a few seconds and thedisc
should play. CD anda CD symbol will also appear on
the display. Anytimeyou are playing a CD, the letters
CD will be next to the CD symbol.

3-22
If the disc comes back out and ERR appears on the NEXT (3): Press NEXT or the SEEK right arrow to
display, it could be that: search for the next selection. If you hold this button or
press it more than once, the disc will advance further.
0 You are driving on a very rough road. (The disc
The next track number will appearon the display. Sound
should play when the roadgets smoother.)
is muted in this mode.
0 The disc is upside down.
REV (4): Press and hold REVto return rapidly to a
0 It is dirty, scratched or wet. favorite passage. You will hear the disc selection play at
0 It is very humid. (Ifso, wait about an hour and high speed while you pressthe REV button. This allows
try again.) you to listen and find out when the disc is atthe desired
selection. Release REVto resume playing.
0 The disc player is veryhot.
FWD (6): Press and holdthis button to advance rapidly
Press RECALL to make ERR go off the display. within a track.You will hear the disc selection play at
PREV (1): Press PREV or the SEEK left arrow to high speed while you pressthe FWD button. This allows
search for the previous selection. If you hold this button you to listen and find out when the disc is atthe desired
or press it more than once, thedisc will advance further. selection. Release FWD to resume playing.
Sound is muted in this mode. RECALL: Press this button to see what track is playing.
RDM (2): Press this buttonto play the tracks on the disc Press it again within five seconds to see how long the
in random order. While in the RDM mode, RANDOM CD has been playing that track. Elapsed time is
appears on the display. Press RDM againto return to displayed in minutes and tenths of a second.The track
normal play. number will also appear when a new track begins to
play. Press RECALL againto return to the time display.

3-23
AM-FM: While in theCD mode, press this button to Remote CassetteTape Player (If Equipped)
stop playing the CD and play the radio.The CD symbol
will still display but the word CD will be replaced with
either AM, FMl or FM2. (If the radio is turned off, the
disc stays in the player and will resume playing at the
point where it stopped.)
CD AUX: To switch between the player and the radio
when a disc is playing, press the AM-FM button.To
return to the player, pressCD AUX. When a disc is
playing, the lettersCD and the CD symbol will appear If you have an AM-FM Stereo Audio Compact Disc
on the display. (Ifthe radio is turned off, the disc stays Automatic Tone Control System that includesa remote
in the player and will resume playing at the point where cassette player, thecassette player is located in the
it stopped.) floor console.
EJECT: Press this buttonto eject the disc from the Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
player and play the radio. When the same or a new disc 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than
is inserted, the disc will start playing
on track one. If a that are so thin they may not work well in this player.
compact disc is left sitting in the opening for more than
a few seconds, the player will pull the CD back in. The To load a cassette tape with the ignitionoff, first press
radio will continue playing. When the ignition is off, EJECT on the remote player. Then, insert the cassette tape.
press this button to load a CD. The tape will play if the ignition on
is but the radio is off.
Once the tape is playing,use the control knobsfor VOL,
AUTO TONE, BAL, FADE, BASS and TREBjust as
you do for the radio. A lighted tape symbol shows when
a cassette tape is in the player. A lighted arrow will also
appear and showthe direction of play when a tape
is active.

3-24
The player automatically senses
if the cassettetape is metal (5): Press this pushbutton to turn Dolby on andoff.
or CrO2 and adjusts for best playback sound. For metal tapes, is active when a tape is inserted in the remote
Dolby
the double-D symbol will appear on the display. cassette. The double-D symbol will appear on
the display.
Anytime a cassette tape is inserted, the top side is
selected for play first. Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
PREV (1): Press PREV or the SEEK left arrow (in the
and the double-D symbolare trademarks of Dolby
opposite direction that the lighted tape direction arrow
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
points) to search for the previous selection. A minimum
three-second blank gap is neededfor the player to stop FWD (6): Press this button to rapidly advance the tape.
at the beginning ofthe selection. The tape direction The tape will rapidly advance to the end of the cassette
arrow will blink duringthe SEEK operation and the reel or until you press FWDagain. The radio plays the
sound is muted in this mode. last selected station during FWD.
NEXT (3): Press NEXT or the SEEK right arrow (in the PROG: Press this button on the remote player to go
direction that the lighted tapedirection arrow points) to from one side of the tape to the other.
search for the next selection. The tape direction arrow TAPE: Press the AM-FM button to switch from the
will blink during SEEK operationand the sound is is playing. To return to
player and the radio when a tape
muted in this mode. the tape player, pressCD AUX. The lighted arrow will
REV (4): Press this buttonto rapidly reverse thetape. appear next to the symbol and show the direction of play
The tape will rapidly reverseto the beginning of the when a tape isactive.
cassette reel or until you press REVagain. The radio EJECT Press this button on the remote playerto
plays the last selected station during REV. remove the tape. EJECT can be used witheither the
ignition or radio off. Also, you must press EJECT before
loading a cassette with the radio off to allow loading.

3-25
Theft-Deterrent Feature(If Equipped) 1. Write down anythree or four-digit number from
000 to 1999 and keepit in a safe place separate from
THEFTLOCK@ is designedto discourage theft of your the vehicle.
radio. It works by using secret
a code to disable all radio
functions whenever battery power is removed. Your 2. Turn the ignitionto ACCESSORY or RUN.
audio system is equipped with THEFTLOCK if 3. Turn the radiooff.
THEFTLOCK is displayedon the front of the radio.
4. Press the 1 and4 buttons together. Hold them down
The THEFTLOCKfeature for the radio may be usedor until --- shows on the display. Nextyou will use the
ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and the secret code number whichyou have written down.
radio is not protected by the
feature. If THEFTLOCK is
activated, your radio will not operateif stolen. 5. Press MN and000 will appear on the display.
When THEFTLOCK isactivated, the radio will display 6 . Press MN again to make the lasttwo digits agree
LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery with your code.
power has been interrupted. If your battery loses power 7. Press HR to make the first oneor twodigits agree
for any reason, you must unlock the radio withthe secret with your code.
code before it willoperate.
8. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature code matches thesecret code you have written down.
The display will showREP to let you know that you
The instructions which follow explain howto enter your need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm your
secret codeto activate the THEFTLOCK system. It is secret code.
recommended that you read through all nine steps
before starting the procedure. 9. Press AM-FM andthis time the display will show
SEC to let you know that your radiois secure. The
NOTE: If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse indicator by the volume control will begin flashing
between any steps, the radio automatically revertsto when the ignition is turnedoff.
time and you muststart the procedure over atStep 4.

3-26
Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature
Power Loss Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than 15 seconds between steps:
15 seconds between steps: 1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.
1. LOC appears when the ignition is on. 2. Turn the radio off.
2. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display. 3. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down
3. Press MN againto make the last two digits agree until SEC shows on the display.
with your code.
4. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
4. Press HR to make the first oneor two digits agree
5 . Press MN again to makethe last two digits agree
with yourcode.
with your code.
5 . Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
6. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
code matches the secret code you have writtendown.
with your code.
The display will showSEC, indicating the radio is
now operable and secure. 7. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
If you enter the wrong code eight times, INOP will The display will show ---,indicating that theradio is
appear on the display. You will have to wait an hour
no longer secured.
with the ignition on before you can try again. When you
try again, you will only have three chances to enter the If the code entered is incorrect, SEC will appear onthe
correct code before INOP appears. display. The radio will remain secureduntil the correct
code is entered.
If you lose or forget your code, contact your dealer.
When battery poweris removed andlater applied to a
secured radio, the radio won’t turn on andLOC will
appear on the display.

3-27
To unlock a secured radio, see “Unlocking the To help avoid hearingloss or damage:
Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss” earlier 0 Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.
in this section.
Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably
Understanding Radio Reception and clearly.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. Thelonger range, however, can
I NOTICE:
I

cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick I Before you add any sound equipment to your
up noise from thingslike storms and power lines. Try --
vehicle like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it. --
telephone or two-way radio be sureyou can
add whatyou want. If you can, it’s very
FM Stereo important to do properly.
it Added sound
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals equipment may interfere with the operation of
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall your vehicle’s engine, Delco Electronics radioor
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing other systems, and even damage them. Your
the soundto come andgo. vehicle’s systems mayinterfere with the
Tips About Your Audio System operation of sound equipment that has been
added improperly.
Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable
until it is too late. Your hearing can adaptto higher So, before adding sound equipment, check with
volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be loud your dealer andbe sure to check Federal rules
and harmfulto your hearing. Take precautionsby covering mobileradio and telephoneunits.
adjusting the volume controlon your radio to a safe
sound level before your hearingadapts to it.

3-28
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player When using a scrubbing action, non-abrasive cleaning
cassette, it is normal for the cassetteto eject because
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause your unit is equipped with a cut tape detection feature
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettesor a damaged and a cleaning cassette may appear as a broken tape. To
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their prevent the cleaning cassettefrom being ejected, use the
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and following steps.
extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player. If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM
Stereo with
Cassette Tape Player:
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLN to indicate 1. Turn the ignitionto RUN or ACCESSORY.
that you have used your tape playerfor 50 hours without 2. Turn the radioon.
resetting the tape clean timer. If this message appears on
the display, your cassettetape player needs to be 3. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
cleaned. It willstill play tapes, butyou should clean it as 4. Within five seconds, press and hold the REV and
soon as possible to preventdamage to your tapes and FWD buttons at the same timefor three seconds. The
player. If you notice a reduction in sound quality, trya tape symbol on the display will flash, showing that
known good cassetteto see if it is the tapeor the tape the cut tape detection feature is no longer active.
player at fault. If this other cassette has no improvement
in sound quality, clean the tape player. 5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.
The recommended cleaning methodfor your cassette
tape player is the use of a scrubbing action, If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo wit
non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub Cassette Tape Player and Automatic Tone Control:
the tape headas the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. 1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
The recommended cleaning cassetteis available through
your dealership (GM Part No. 12344789). 2. Turn the radio off.

3-29
3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five Care of Your Compact Discs
seconds. The tape symbolon the display willflash
for two seconds. Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaningcassette while and dust.If the surfaceof a disc is soiled, dampen a
the tape symbolis flashing. clean, soft cloth ina mild, neutral detergent solution and
5. Eject the cleaningcassette after the manufacturer’s clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
recommended cleaning time. Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling
When the cleaningcassette has been ejected, the cut tape discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges
or the
detection feature is active again. edge of the hole and the outer edge.
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type Care of Your Compact Disc Player
cleaner which uses acassette with a fabric beltto clean
The use of CD lens cleanerdiscs is not advised,due to
the tape head. Thistype of cleaning cassette will not
the risk of contaminating thelens of the CD optics with
eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.
The use of a non-scrubbingaction, dry-type cleaning Fixed Mast Antenna
cassette is not recommended.
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
After you clean the player, press and holdEJECT for without being damaged.If the mast should ever become
five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand.If the
display --- to show the indicator was reset. mast is badly bent, as it might be by vandals, you should
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality may replace it.
degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette tape is Check every once in a whileto be sure the mastis still
in good condition beforeyou have your tape tightened to the fender.
player serviced.

3-30
Section 4 Your Driving an” the Roa”

Here you’ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve also
included many other useful tips on driving.

4-2 Defensive Driving 4-27 Driving at Night


4-3 Drunken Driving 4-28 Driving in Rain and onWet Roads
4-5 Control of a Vehicle 4-3 1 City Driving
4-6 Braking 4-32 Freeway Driving
4-9 Steering 4-33 Before Leaving on a Long Trip
4-1 1 Off-Road Recovery 4-34 Highway Hypnosis
4-1 1 Passing 4-34 Hill and Mountain Roads
4-13 Loss of Control 4-36 Winter Driving
4- 14 Driving Guidelines 4-39 Recreational Vehicle Towing
4-14 Off-Road Driving with Your GM 4-40 Loading Your Vehicle
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle 4-42 Towing a Trailer
Defensive driving really means “be readyfor anything.’’
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are goingto be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might
do. Be ready for their mistakes.
~ Rear-end collisions are aboutthemostpreventableof
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough
~ following distance. It’sthebestdefensivedriving
1 maneuver, in bothcityandrural driving. You never
know when the vehicle infront of you is going to brake
or turn suddenly.
Defensive driving requires that adriver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything thatdistracts from the
driving task -- such as concentrating on a cellular
telephone call, reading, or reachingfor something on
Defensive Driving the floor -- makes proper defensive driving more
difficult and can even causea collision, with resulting
The best advice anyone can give about driving is: injury. Aska passenger to help do things like this, or
Drive defensively. pull off the roadin a safe place to do them yourself.
Please start with a very important safety devicein your These simple defensive driving techniques couldsave
vehicle: Buckle up. (See “Safety Belts”in the Index.) your life.

4-2
Drunken Driving The obvious way to solveh s highway safety problemis
for people never todrink alcohol and then drive. But what
Death and injury associated with drinlung and driving is if people do? How much is “too much”if the driver plans
a national tragedy. It’s the numberone contributor to the to dnve? It’s a lot less than many mightthink. Although it
highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims depends on each person and situation, here is some general
every year. information on the problem.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive The Blood AlcoholConcentration (BAC) of someone
a vehicle: who is drinking depends upon four things:
0 Judgment 0 The amount of alcohol consumed
0 Muscular Coordination 0 The drinker’s body weight
0 Vision e The amount of food that is consumed before and
0 Attentiveness. during drinking
Police records show that almost half of all motor 0 The length of time it has taken the drinker to
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases, consume the alcohol.
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking According to the American Medical Association, a
and driving. In recent years, over 17,000 annual motor 180-lb. (82 kg) person whodrinks three 12-ounce
vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use (355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a
of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured. BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reachthe
Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half the adult same BACby drinking three 4-ounce (120 ml) glasses
population -- choose never to drink alcohol,so they never of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
drive after drinking.For persons under 21, it’s against the (45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.
law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good
medical, psychological and developmental reasons for
these laws.

4-3
Since alcohol is carried in body water,this means that a
woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a
man of hersame body weight when each has thesame
number of drinks.
The law in manyU.S. states sets the legal limit ata BAC
of 0.10 percent. In a growing number ofU.S. states, and
throughout Canada, the limit is 0.08 percent. In some
other countries, it’s even lower. The BAC limitfor all
commercial drivers in the UnitedStates is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over0.10 percent after three to six
drinks (in one hour).Of course, as we’ve seen, it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how
quickly the person drinks them.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the drivingskills of
many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
It’s the amount of alcoholthat counts. For example,if 0.05 percent, and that theeffects are worse at night. All
the same person drank three double martinis(3 ounces drivers are impaired at BAClevels above 0.05 percent.
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
BAC would be closeto 0.12 percent. A person who increases sharplyfor drivers who have a BACof
consumes foodjust before or during drinking will havea 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
somewhat lower BAC level. 0.06 percent has doubledhis or her chanceof having a
collision. At a BAC levelof 0.10 percent, the chanceof
There is a gender difference,too. Women generally have
this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; ata
a lower relative percentageof body water than men.
level of 0.15 percent, the chanceis 25 timesgreater!

4-4
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink.No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the
right answer. Whatif there’s an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street? Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and
to react quickly enough to avoid the collision. judgment can beaffected by even a smallamount
--
of alcohol. You can have a serious or even
There’s something else about drinking and driving that
many people don’t know. Medical research shows that --
fatal collision if you drive after drinking.
alcohol in a person’s system can make crashinjuries Please don’t drink and drive or ride with a driver
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or who has been drinking. Ride homein a cab;or if
heart. This means that when anyone who has been you’re with a group, designate driver
a who will
drinking -- driver or passenger -- is in a crash, that not drink.
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehiclego where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and
the accelerator. All threesystems have to do their work
at the places where thetires meet the road.

4-5
Braking
Braking action involvesperception time and
reaction time.
First, you haveto decide to pushon the brake pedal.
That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot anddo it. That’s reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But
that’s only an average. It might be less with one driver
and as long as two or three secondsor more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all playa part. So do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But even in3/4 of a second, a vehicle
moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).
That could be a lotof distance in an emergency, so
keeping enough space between your vehicle and others
is important.
Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s
easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
and road can provide. That means you can lose control with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement or
of your vehicle. gravel); the conditionof the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the conditionof your brakes; the weight of the
vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.

4-6
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in If there’s a problem with the
spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy anti-lock brake system,this
braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic.This is a warning light will stay on.
mistake. Your brakes may not have timeto cool between See “Anti-Lock Brake
hard stops. Your brakes will wearout much faster if you System Warning Light” in
do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the the Index.
traffic and allow realistic followingdistances, you will
eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you’redriving, brake
normally but don’t pump your brakes.If you do, the
pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still havesome power brake assist. But
you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is
used up, it may take longerto stop and the brake pedal
will be harderto push.
Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes (ABS).ABS is an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a brakingskid.
When you start yourengine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will checkitself. You may
hear a momentary motoror clicking noise whilethis test
is going on. This is normal. Here’s how anti-lock works. Let’s say the roadis wet.
You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animaljumps out in
front of you.
4-7
You slam on the brakes. Here’s what happens with ABS. You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updateson
of the wheels is aboutto stop rolling, the computer will wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
separately work the brakesat each front wheel and at
Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need
both rear wheels.
to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure stopping distance.If you get too closeto the vehicle in
faster than anydriver could. The computer is front of you, you won’t have timeto apply your brakes
programmed to make the mostof available tire and if that vehicle suddenly slowsor stops. Always leave
road conditions. enough room up aheadto stop, even though you have
anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Don’t pump the brakes.Just hold the brake pedal down
firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel the
brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise, but this is
normal. On vehicles with four-wheel drive, your
anti-lock brakes work at all times-- whether you are in
two-wheel drive or four-wheel drive,
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.

4-8
Steering Suppose you’re steering througha sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
Power Steering systems -- steering and acceleration -- have to do their
work where the tires meet the road. Adding the sudden
If you lose power steering assist because the engine acceleration can demandtoo much of those places.You
stops or the system is not functioning, youcan steer but can lose control.
it will take much moreeffort.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up onthe
Steering Tips accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle theway you want it
to go, and slow down.
Driving onCurves
Speed limit signs near curves warn thatyou should
It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed. adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speedsare
on
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned based on good weather and roadconditions. Under less
the news happenon curves. Here’s why: favorable conditions you’ll wantto go slower.
Experienced driver or beginner, each of usis subject to If you need to reduce your speedas you approach a
the same laws of physics when drivingon curves. The curve, do it before you enter the curve, while yourfront
traction of the tires against the road surface makes it wheels are straight ahead.
possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keep curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
the vehicle going in thesame direction. If you’ve ever accelerate until youare out of the curve, and then
tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this. accelerate gently into the straightaway.
The traction you can get ina curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
you’re in a curve, speed isthe one factor you
can control.

4-9
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steeringcan be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can
avoid these problemsby braking -- if you can stop in
time. But sometimesyou can’t; there isn’t room. That’s
the time for evasive action -- steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes. (See “Braking in
Emergencies” earlier in this section.) It is betterto
remove as much speedas you can from a possible
collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or An emergency like this requires close attention and a
right depending on the space available. quick decision. Ifyou are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can
turn it a full180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you haveto act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reasonto practice defensive drivingat
all times and wear safety belts properly.

4-10
Off-Road Recovery Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving. two-lane highway waitsfor just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes
back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
OFF - ROAD RECOVE
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
LEFT APPROX.
QUARTER TURN judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can
suddenly put the passingdriver face to face with the
SLOW DOWN worst of all traffic accidents -- the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
edge of paved surface
0 “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and to
crossroads for situations that might affect your passing
patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever about
making a successful pass, wait for a better time.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly belowthe 0 Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines.
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the If you can see asign up ahead that mightindicate a
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer turn or an intersection, delay your pass.A broken
so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement. center line usually indicates it’s all right to pass
You can turn thesteering wheel up to one-quarter turn (providing the road ahead is clear). Never cross a
until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge. solid line on your side of the lane or a double
Then turn yoursteering wheel to go straight down solid line, evenif the road seems empty of
the roadway. approaching traffic.

4-11
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder and
while you’re awaiting an opportunity. Forone thing, start your left lane change signal before moving out
following too closely reduces your area of vision, of the right laneto pass. Whenyou are far enough
especially if you’re followinga larger vehicle. Also, ahead of the passed vehicleto see its front in your
you won’t have adequate space if the vehicle inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a and move backinto the right lane. (Remember that
reasonable distance. your right outside mirroris convex. The vehicle you
When it looks like a chanceto pass is coming up, just passed may seem to be farther away from you
start to accelerate but stayin the right lane and don’t than it really is.)
get too close. Time your move so you will be Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a timeon
increasing speed as the time comes to move into the two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a next vehicle.
“running start” that more than makes upfor the Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if Even though the brake lampsare not flashing, it may
something happensto cause you to cancel your pass, be slowing downor starting to turn.
you need only slow down anddrop back again and
wait for another opportunity. If you’re being passed, make it easy for the
following driverto get ahead ofyou. Perhaps you
0 If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait
can ease a little to the right.
your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying to
pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle.
Remember to glance over your shoulder and check
the blind spot.

4-12
Loss of Control If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quicklysteer the way you want the
Let’s review what driving experts say about what vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, your
happens when thethree control systems (brakes, steering vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a
and acceleration) don’t have enoughfriction where the second skid if it occurs.
tires meet the road to dowhat the driver has asked.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer and gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll
constantly seekan escape route or area of less danger. want to slow down andadjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
Skidding surfaces because stopping distance willbe longer and
In a slud, a driver can lose controlof the vehicle. vehicle control more limited.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not “overdriving” While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
those conditions. But skids are always possible. your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or
braking (including engine brakingby shifting to a lower
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tiresto slide.
three control systems. In the brakingskid, your wheels You may not realize the surface is slippery until your
aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
much speed or steering in a curve causes tiresto slip and clues -- such as enough water,ice or packed snow on
lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too the road to make a “mirrored surface” -- and slow down
much throttle causes the driving wheelsto spin. when you have any doubt.
A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best
handled by easing yourfoot off the accelerator pedal. Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid onlythe braking skid.

4-13
Driving Guidelines Off-Road Driving withYour GM
This multipurpose passenger vehicle is defined as a Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle
utility vehicle in Consumer InformationRegulations This off-road guide isfor vehicles that have
issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety four-wheel drive.
Administration (NHTSA)of the United States
Department of Transportation. Utility vehicles have Also, see “Anti-Lock Brakes’’in the Index.
higher groundclearance and a narrower track to make If your vehicle doesn’t have four-wheel drive, you
them capable of performing ina wide variety of off-road shouldn’t drive off-road unlessyou’re on a level,
applications. Specific designcharacteristics give them a solid surface.
higher center of gravity than ordinary cars.An
advantage of the higher groundclearance is a better Off-road driving can be greatfun. But it does have some
view of the road allowing youto anticipate problems. definite hazards. The greatest of these is the terrain itself.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds “Off-roading” means you’ve leftthe great North
as conventional two-wheel-drive vehiclesany more than American road system behind. Traffic lanes aren’t
low-slung sports cars are designed to perform marked. Curves aren’t banked.There are no road signs.
satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If at all Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphillor downhill. In
possible, avoid sharp turnsor abrupt maneuvers. As with short, you’ve gone right back to nature.
other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle
correctly may result in loss ofcontrol or Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that’s
vehicle rollover. why it’s very important that you read this guide. You’ll
find many driving tips andsuggestions. These will help
make your off-road drivingsafer and more enjoyable.

4-14
Befi: - 1
1
~ u Go Off-Roading
There are some things to do before you go out. For CAUTION:
example, be sure to have all necessary maintenance and
service work done. Check to make sure all underbody 0 Cargo on the load floor piled higher than
shields (if so equipped) are properly attached. Be sure the seatbacks canbe thrown forward
you read all the information about your during a sudden stop. You or your
four-wheel-drive vehicle in this manual. Is there enough passengers could be injured. Keep cargo
fuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated? Are the fluid levels
up where they shouldbe? What are the local laws that below the topof the seatbacks.
apply to off-roading where you’ll be driving? If you
0 Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be
don’t know, you shouldcheck with law enforcement tossed about when driving over rough
people in the area. Will you be on someone’sprivate terrain. You or your passengers can be
land? If so, be sure to get the necessary permission. struck by flying objects.Secure the
cargo properly.
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving 0 Heavy loads on the roof raise thevehicle’s
There are some important things to remember about center of gravity, making it more likely to
how to load your vehicle. roll over. You can be seriously or fatally
0 The heaviest things should be on the load floor and injured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy
forward of your rear axle. Put heavier items as far loads inside the cargo area, not on roof. the
forward as you can. Keep cargo in the cargo areafar asforward
and low as possible.
Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on
the off-road terrain doesn’t toss things around.
You’ll find other importantinformation in this manual.
See “Vehicle Loading,” “Luggage Carrier” and “Tires”
in the Index.

4-15
Environmental Concerns Traveling to Remote Areas
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying It makes senseto plan your trip, especially when going
recreation. However,it also raises environmental to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your route.
concerns. GM recognizes these concerns and urges You are much less likelyto get bad surprises. Get
every off-roader to follow these basic rules for accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try
to learn of any
protecting the environment: blocked or closed roads.
0 Always use established trails, roads and areas that It’s also a good ideato travel with atleast one other
have been specially set aside for public off-road vehicle. If something happens toone of them, the other
recreational driving; obey all posted regulations. can help quickly.
0 Avoid any drivingpractice that could damage the Does your vehicle have a winch?If so, be sure to read
environment -- shrubs, flowers, trees, grasses-- or the winch instructions. In a remote
area, a winch canbe
disturb wildlife (this includes wheel-spinning, to know how to
handy if you get stuck. But you’ll want
breaking down treesor unnecessary driving through use it properly.
streams or over soft ground).
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
0 Always carry a litter bag . . . make sure all refuse is
removed from any campsite before leaving. It’s a good idea to practice in an area that’ssafe and
close to home before yougo into the wilderness.
0 Take extreme care with open
fires (where permitted), Off-road driving does require some new and different
camp stoves and lanterns. driving skills. Here’s what we mean.
0 Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other Tune your sensesto different kinds of signals.Your
combustible materials that could catchfire from the eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep the terrain
heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system. for unexpected obstacles. Yourears need to listen for
unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms, hands,
feet and body, you’ll need to respond to vibrations and
vehicle bounce.

4-16
Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful Scanning the Terrain
off-road driving. One of the best ways to control your
vehicle is to control your speed. Here are some things to Off-road driving can take you over manydifferent kinds
keep in mind. At higher speeds: of terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrain and
its many different features. Here are some things
you approach things faster and you have less time to to consider.
scan the terrain for obstacles.
Sugace Conditions. Off-roading can take you over
0 you have less time to react. hard-packed dirt, gravel,rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow
0 you have more vehicle bounce when you drive or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering,
over obstacles. acceleration and braking of your vehicle in different
ways. Depending upon the kind of surface you are on,
0 you'll need more distance for braking, especially you may experience slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,
since you're on an unpc"=.?d surface. delayed acceleration, poor traction andlonger
braking distances.
I
Sugace Obstacles . Unseen or hidden obstacles can be
hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut or bump can startle youif
you're not prepared for them. Often these obstacles are
When you're driving off-road, bouncing and hidden by grass, bushes, snow or even therise and fall of
quick changes in direction can easily throw
you the terrain itself. Here are some things to consider:
out of position. This could cause
you to lose 0 Is the path ahead clear?
control andcrash. So, whether you're driving on
or off the road, you and your passengers should 0 Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
safety
belts.
wear 0 Does the travel take you uphill or downhill? (There's
more discussion of these subjects later.)
0 Will you have to stop suddenly or change
direction quickly?

4-17
When you drive overobstacles or rough terrain, keep a Driving on Off-Road Hills
firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs or other
surface features can jerk the wheel out of your handsif Off-road driving often takesyou up, down or across a
you’re not prepared. hill. Driving safely on hills requires goodjudgment and
an understanding of what your vehicle can and can’t do.
When you drive over bumps, rocks,or other obstacles, There are some hills that simplycan’t be driven, no
your wheels canleave the ground. If this happens, even matter how well built the vehicle.
with one ortwo wheels, youcan’t control the vehicleas
well or at all.
Because you will be onan unpaved surface, it’s
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden turns or sudden braking. Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle, If
In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind of you drive up them,you will stall. If you drive
alertness from drivingon paved roads and highways. down them, you can’t control your speed, If you
There are no road signs, posted speed limitsor signal drive across them, you will roll over.
You could be
lights. You have to use your own goodjudgment about seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt
what is safe and what isn’t. about the steepness, don’t drive the hill.
Drinking and driving canbe very dangerous on any
road. And this is certainly true for off-road driving. At
the very time you need specialalertness and driving
skills, your reflexes, perceptions andjudgment can be
affected by even a small amountof alcohol. You could
have a serious -- or even fatal -- accident if you drink
and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking.
See “Drunken Driving” in the Index.

4-18
Approaching a Hill 0 What’s beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and walk
When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it’s one the hill if you don’t know. It’s the smart way to
of those hills that’s just too steepto climb, descend or find out.
cross. Steepness can be hard to judge. On a very small
hill, for example, there may be a smooth, constant Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have
incline with only a small change in elevation where you ruts, gullies, troughs and exposed rocks because they
can easily see all the way to the top. On a large hill, the are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.
incline may get steeper as you near the top, but you may
not see this because the crest of the hill is hidden by Driving Uphill
bushes, grass or shrubs. Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill, you
Here are some other things to consider as you approach need to take some special steps.
a hill. 0 Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the
Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get sharply steering wheel.
steeper in places? Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain
0 Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the your speed. Don’t use more power than you need,
surface cause tire slipping? because you don’t want your wheelsto start spinning
or sliding.
Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you
won’t have to make turning maneuvers? Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible.If
the path twists and turns, you might wantto find
Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your another route.
path (boulders, trees, logs or ruts)?

4-19
’ /1\
I
CAUTIs-N: 1
~ Tu,Ang ordriving across steep hills can be Driving to the top (crest)of a hill at full speedcan
1 dangerous. You could lose traction, slide cause an accident. There could be a drop-off,
sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be embankment, cliff, or even another vehicle. You
seriously injured orkilled. When drivingup hills, could be seriouslyinjured or killed. As you near
always try togo straight up. the topof a hill, slow down and stay alert.

Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of @ What should I do if my vehicle stalls, oris about
the hill. to stall, andI can’t make it up the
hill?
0 Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more visible A: If this happens, there are some things you should
to approaching traffic on trailsor hills. do, and there are some things you must not do.
0 Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill to First, here’s whatyou should do:
let opposing trafficknow you’re there.
Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep it
Use your headlamps even during the day. They make from rolling backwards. Also, apply the parking brake.
you more visibleto oncoming traffic.
0 If your engine is still running, shift the transmission
to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill in REVERSE (R).

4-20
0 If your engine has stopped running, you’ll need to Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle. Then
restart it. With the brake pedal depressed and the apply the parking brake. Shift to REVERSE (R), release
parking brake still applied, shift the transmission to the parking brake, and slowly back straight down.
PARK (P) (or, shift to NEUTRAL (N) if your
vehicle has a manual transmission) and restart the Never attempt to turn around if you are about to stall
engine. Then, shift to REVERSE (R), release the when going up a hill. If the hill is steep enough to
parking brake, and slowly back down the hill as stall your vehicle, it’s steep enough to cause you to
straight as possible in REVERSE (R). roll over if you turn around. If you can’t make it up
the hill, you must backstraight down the hill.
As you are backing down the hill, put yourleft hand
on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position. This &= Suppose, after stalling,I try to back down the
way, you’ll be able to tell if your wheelsare straight hill and decideI just can’t doit. What should
and maneuver as you back down. It’s best thatyou I do?
back down the hill with your wheelsstraight rather
than in theleft or right direction. Turning the wheel A: Set the parking brake, put your transmission
too far tothe left or right will increase the possibility in PARK (P) (or the manual transmission in
of a rollover. FIRST (1)) and turn off the engine.Leave the
Here are some things youmust not do if you stall, vehicle and go get some help. Exiton the uphill
or are about to stall, when going up a hill. side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would
take if it rolled downhill.
Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into
NEUTRAL (N) (or depressing the clutch, if you
have a manual transmission)to “rev-up” the engine
and regain forward momentum. This won’t work.
Your vehicle will roll backwards very quickly and
you could go out of control.

4-21
Driving Downhill
When off-roading takesyou downhill, you’ll wantto
consider a number of things:
0 How steep is the downhill? WillI be able to maintain Heavy braking when goingdown a hill can cause
vehicle control? your brakes to overheat and fade. This could cause
loss of control and aserious accident. Apply the
What’s the surface like? Smooth? Rough? Slippery?
Hard-packed dirt? Gravel? brakes lightly when descendinga hill and use a low
gear to keep vehicle speed under control.
Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs? -

Boulders?
0 What’s at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden @ Are there some things I should not dowhen
creek bankor even a river bottom with large rocks? driving downa hill?
If you decide you cango down a hill safely, then tryto A: Yes! These are important because if you
keep your vehicle headedstraight down, and use a low ignore them you couldlose control and have a
gear. This way, engine dragcan help your brakes and serious accident.
they won’t have to do all the work. Descend slowly,
keeping your vehicle under control at all times. 0 When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you
across the incline of the hill. A hill that’s nottoo
steep to drive down may be too steep to drive across.
You could roll over ifyou don’t drive straight down.
0 Never go downhill with the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), or with the clutch pedal depressed
in a manual shift. This iscalled “free-wheeling.”
Your brakes will haveto do all the work and could
overheat and fade.

4-22
@ Am I likely to stall when going downhill? from the front wheels to the rear wheels) reduces the
likelihood thevehicle will tumble end over end. But
A: It’s much more likelyto happen going uphill. But if when you drive across an incline, the much more
it happens going downhill, here’s whatto do. narrow track width (the distance between the left and
0 Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes. right wheels) may not prevent the vehicle from tilting
Apply the parking brake. and rolling over.Also, driving acrossan incline puts
more weight on thed o w h l l wheels. This could cause
a Shift to PARK (P) (or to NEUTRAL (N) with the a downhill slide or a rollover.
manual transmission) and, while still braking, restart
the engine. 0 Surface conditions can be a problem when you drive
across a hill. Loosegravel, muddy spots, or even wet
a Shift back to a low gear,release the parking brake, grass can cause your tires to slip sideways, downhill.
and drive straight down. If the vehicle slips sideways, it can hit something
0 If the engine won’tstart, get out and get help. that will trip it (arock, a rut, etc.)and roll over.
Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the
Driving Across an Incline incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with
Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probablygo across the uphill wheels,or if the downhill wheelsdrop into
the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have to decide a rut or depression, your vehicle cantilt even more.
whether to try to drive across the incline.Here are some For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully
things to consider: whether to try to drive across anincline. Just because
0 A hill that can be driven straight up or down may be the trail goes across theincline doesn’t mean you have
too steepto drive across. When yougo straight up or to drive it. The last vehicle to try it might have
down a hill, the lengthof the wheel base (the distance rolled over.

4-23
Stalling on an Incline
If your vehicle stalls when you’re crossing an incline, be
sure you (and your passengers) get out on the uphill
Driving across an incline that’s too steep
will side, even if the door there is harderto open. If you get
make yourvehicle roll over. You could be out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll
seriously injured orkilled. If you have any doubt over, you’ll be rightin its path.
about thesteepness of the incline, don’tdrive If you have to walk down theslope, stay out of the path
across it. Find another route instead. the vehicle will takeif it does roll over.

What if I’m driving acrossan incline that’s not


too steep, butI hit some loose gravel and start to
slide downhill. What shouldI do?
A: If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways,
turn downhill. This should help straighten out the
vehicle and prevent theside slipping. However, a
much better way to prevent this is to get out and
“walk the course” so you know what thesurhce is
like before you drive it.

4-24
When you drive on sand, you’ll sense a changein wheel
A CAUTION: traction. But itwill depend upon how loosely packed the
sand is. On loosely packed sand(as on beaches or sand
dunes) your tires will tend to sink into the sand. This has
Getting out on the downhill(low) side of an effect on steering, accelerating and braking.You may
stopped across an incline is dangerous. If the want to reduce the air pressure in your tires slightly
vehicle rollsover, you could be crushedor killed. when driving on sand. This will improve traction.
Always get out on the uphill (high) sideof the Hard packed snow and ice offer the worsttire traction.
vehicle and staywell clear of the rollover path. On these surfaces, it’s very easy to lose control. On wet
ice, for example, the tractionis so poor that you will
have difficulty accelerating. And if you do get moving,
Driving in d, md, Snow or Ice poor steering and difficult braking can causeyou to slide
When you drive in mud, snow or sand, your wheels out of control.
won’t get good traction. You can’t accelerate as quickly,
turning is more difficult, and you’ll need longer
braking distances.
It’s best to use a low gear when you’re in mud -- the
deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In reallydeep mud, Driving on frozen lakes, ponds or rivers canbe
the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you don’t dangerous. Underwater springs, currents under
get stuck. the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the ice. Your
vehicle could fall through theice and you and
your passengers could drown. Drive your vehicle
on safe surfacesonly.

4-25
Driving in Water
Light rain causes no special off-road driving problems.
But heavy raincan mean flash flooding, and flood
’A CAUTION:
waters demand extremecaution. Driving through rushing water canbe dangerous.
Find out how deep the water is beforeyou drive through Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream
it. If it’s deep enough to cover your wheel hubs,axles or and you and your passengers could drown. If it’s
exhaust pipe, don’t try it-- you probably won’t get only shallow water, it can still wash away the
through. Also, water thatdeep can damage your axle ground from under your tires, and you could lose
and other vehicle parts. traction and roll the vehicle over. Don’t drive
If the water isn’t too deep, then drive throughit slowly. through rushing water.
At fast speeds, watersplashes on your ignition system ~

and your vehicle canstall. Stalling can also occur if you


get your tailpipe under water. And, as long as your See “Driving Through Water” inthe Index for more
tailpipe is under water, you’ll never be able tostart your information on driving through water.
engine. When you go through water, remember that
when your brakes get wet,it may take you longer
After Off-Road Driving
to stop. Remove any brushor debris that has collected on the
underbody, chassis or under the hood. These
accumulations canbe a fire hazard.
Aftc- lperation in mud or sand, have the brakelinings
~

cleaned andchecked. These substances can cause


glazing and uneven braking. Check the bodystructure,
steering, suspension, wheels, tires and exhaust system
for damage. Also, check the fuel lines and cooling
system for any leakage.

4-26
Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to Rere are some tips on night driving.
off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for 0 Drivedefensively.
additional information.
0 Don’t drink and drive.
Driving at Night 0 Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
0 Since you can’t see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles.
Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up onlyso much road ahead.
0 In remote areas, watch for animals.
0 If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place and rest.
Night Vision
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as
we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old
driver may require at least twice as much light to see the
same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut
impaired -- by alcohol or drugs, with night vision down on glare from headlamps, but theyalso make a lot
problems, or by fatigue. of things invisible.
4-27
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching 1 -I and on Wet Roads
headlamps. It can take a secondor two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When you
are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who
doesn’t lower the high beams,or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring
directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean -- inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Eventhe inside of the glass
can build upa film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than cleanglass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light upfar less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way,it’s easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Somedrivers suffer from night
blindness -- the inability to see in dim light -- and aren’t Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
even aware of it. road, you can’t stop, accelerateor turn as well because
your tire-to-road traction isn’tas good as on dry roads.
And, if your tires don’t have much tread left,you’ll get
even less traction. It’s always wiseto go slower and be
cautious if rain starts to fall whileyou are driving. The
surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexesare
tuned for driving on dry pavement.

4-28
The heavier the rain, the harderit is to see. Evenif your Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
windshield wiper blades arein good shape, a heavy rain going through somecar washes can cause problems, too.
can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals, The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles.
pavement markings, theedge of the road and even But if you can't, try to slow down before you hit them.
people walking.
It's wise to keep your wiping equipmentin good shape
and keep your windshield washer tank filled with
washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on Wet brakes can causeaccidents. They won't work
the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to separate as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to
from the inserts.
one side. You could lose control of the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water or
a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until
your brakes worknormally.
Hydroplaning Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Hydroplaning is dangerous.So much water can build up I I
under your tires that they can actually ridethe
onwater.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re
NOTICE:
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,
it has little or no contact with the road. If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or
standing water, water can come in through your
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your engine’s air intake and badly damage your
tires do not have much treador if the pressurein one or
is slightly
engine. Never drive through water that
more is low. It can happen if a lot of wateris standing on
the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone lower than the underbodyof your vehicle.If you
poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive
water’s surface, there couldbe hydroplaning. through them very slowly.
I I
Hydroplaning usually happensat higher speeds. There
just isn’t a hard and fastrule about hydroplaning.The Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
best advice isto slow down whenit is raining.
Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful whenyou pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself moreclear room
ahead, and be preparedto have your view restricted
by road spray.
0 Have good tires with proper tread depth. (See
“Tires” in the Index.)

4-30
City Driving One of the biggest problems with citystreets is the
amount of traffic on them. You’ll wantto watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and payattention to
traffic signals.
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
a Know the best way to getto where you are going. Get
a city map and planyour trip into an unknownpart of
the cityjust as you would for a cross-country trip.
a Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most
large cities. You’ll save time and energy. (See the
next part, “Freeway Driving.”)
a Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic light
is there because the corner is busy enoughto need it.
When a light turns green, and just before you start to
move, check both waysfor vehicles that have not
cleared the intersection or may be running the
red light.

4-31
Freeway Driving At the entrance, thereis usually aramp that leadsto the
freeway. If you have aclear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to
check traffic. Tryto determine where you expectto
blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at closeto
the prevailing speed. Switchon your turn signal, check
your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway,adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailingrate if it’s slower. Stay
in theright lane unless you wantto pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in your
“blind” spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways, slightly slower at night.
expressways, turnpikesor superhighways) are the safest
of allroads.Buttheyhavetheirownspecialrules.Whenyouwant to leavethefreeway,move to theproper
lane well in advance. If you miss your exit,do not,
The most adviceOn driving is: under
any
circumstances, stop and
back
up.
Drive
on to
up with traffic and keepto the right. Drive at the same the nextexit.
speed most of the other driversare driving. Too-fastor
too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
left lane on a freeway as a passinglane.
4-32
The exit speed is usually posted. Here are some things you can check beforea trip:
Reduce your speed accordingto your speedometer, not 0 Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoirfull? Are
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance all windows clean inside and outside?
at higher speeds,you may tend to think you are going 0 Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
slower than you actually are.
0 Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
Before Leaving on a Long Trip all levels?
Make sure you’re ready. Tryto be well rested. If you 0 Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses
clean?
must start when you’re notfresh -- such as after a day’s 0 Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
work -- don’t plan to make too many miles thatfirst part
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enoughfor
of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoesyou
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated
to the
can easily drive in.
recommended pressure?
Is your vehicle readyfor a long trip? If you keep it 0 Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook
serviced and maintained, it’s readyto go. If it needs
along your route? Shouldyou delay your trip a short
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
time to avoid a major storm system?
you’ll find experienced and able service experts in GM
dealerships all across North America. They’llbe ready 0 Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
and willing to help if you need it.

4-33
Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads
Is’there actually sucha condition as “highway hypnosis”?
Call it
Or is itjust plain falling asleep at the wheel?
highway hypnosis, lackof awareness, or whatever.
There is something about aneasy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along withthe hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind
against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t let it
happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the
road in less than a second, and you could crash and
be injured.
What can youdo about highway hypnosis?First, be
aware thatit can happen.
Then here are some tips:
Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
to the sides. Check your mirrors and your driving inflat or rolling terrain.
instruments frequently.
If you drive regularly insteep country, or if you’re
If You get Pull Off the road into a service planningtovisitthere,here are sometipsthatcanmake
Or parking area and take a nap, get Someexercise, Or your trips safer and more enjoyable. (See “Off-Road
both.
Forsafety,
treat
drowsiness on the highway
as Driving,7 in the Index for about driving
an emergency. off-road.)
0 Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system and
transmission. These parts can work hard on
A CAUTION:
mountain roads.
Coasting downhill inNEUTRAL (N) or with the
Know how to go down hills. The most important ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have to
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of the
do all the workof slowing down. They couldget
slowing down. Shift to a lower gear whenyou go
down a steep or long hill. so hot thatthey wouldn’t workwell. You would
then have poor braking or even none going down
a hill. You could crash. Always have your engine
running and yourvehicle in gear when you
go downhill.
If you don’t shift down, your brakes could soget
hot that theywouldn’t work well. You would then 0 Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
have poor braking oreven none going down a to a lower gear.The lower gears help cool your
hill. You could crash. Shift down to
let your engine and transmission, andyou can climb the
engine assist your brakes on a steep hill better.
, downhill slope. 0 Stay in your ownlane when driving on two-lane
roads in hillsor mountains. Don’t swing wideor cut
across the centerof the road. Drive at speeds that
let
you stay in your own lane.
e As you go over the top of a hill, bealert. There could
be something in yourlane, like a stalled car or
an accident.

4-35
You may see highway signs on mountains that warn Here are sometips for winterdriving:
of special problems. Examples are long grades, Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area
or winding roads. Be alert to these and take You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
appropriate action. your vehicle.

Winter Driving Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply


of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer
clothing, a small shovel, aflashlight, a red cloth and
reflective warning triangles. And,if you will be driving
under severeconditions, include a small bagof sand, a
piece of old carpetor a coupleof burlap bagsto help
provide traction. Besure you properly secure these
items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll
to be
have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need
very careful.

4-36
Whatever the condition-- smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow -- drive with caution.
Accelerate gently. Trynot to break the fragile traction. If
you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more.
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stopon a slippery road. Even
[: ..........................................
--===l though you have an anti-lock braking system, you’ll
m
want to begin stopping sooner thanyou would on dry
pavement. See “Anti-Lock” in the Index.
Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spotthat’s covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where thesun can’t reach: around
What’s the worst timefor this? “Wet ice.” Very cold clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet Sometimes the surfaceof a curve or an overpassmay
ice can be even more trouble becauseit may offer the remain icy when the surrounding roadsare clear. If
least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about you see a patch ofice ahead of you, brake beforeyou
freezing (32”F; OOC) and freezing rain beginsto fall. are on it. Try not to brake while you’re actually on
Try to avoid driving on wetice until salt and sand crews the ice, and avoid suddensteering maneuvers.
can get there.

4-37
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard

If you are stoppedby heavy snow, you could be ina


serious situation. You should probably stay with your
vehicle unlessyou know for sure that you are nearhelp
and you can hike throughthe snow. Here are some
things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your
passengers safe:
Turn on your hazard flashers. You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.

4-38
Run your engine only as long as you must.This saves

P -1AUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This
uses less fuel for theheat that you get and itkeeps the
battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas restart the vehicle, and possiblyfor signaling later on
to get inside.CO could overcome youand kill with your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
you. You can’t seeit or smell it,so you might not Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
know it is inyour vehicle. Clear away snow from all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again
around the base of your vehicle, especiallyany and repeat this only whenyou feel really uncomfortable
that is blockingyour exhaust pipe. And check from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the
around again from time to time to be sure snow fuel as long as youcan. To help keep warm, you can get
doesn’t collect there. out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
Open a window just a little on the side of the every half houror so until help comes.
vehicle that’s awayfrom the wind. This will help Recreational Vehicle Towing
keep CO out.
Vehicles with two-wheel drive or the electronic shift
transfer case require special modificationsbefore they
can be towed in this manner. Please contact your dealer
for the towing information that is appropriate for your
particular vehicle.

4-39
Loading Your Vehicle The Certificatioflire label also tells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loadson
your front andrear axles, you need to go to a weigh
station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help
you with this. Be sure to spread out your load equallyon
I , 1
both sides of thecenterline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the
GAWR for either the frontor rear axle.

.
u -
u
COLD TIRE PRESSURE If you do have a heavy load,you should spread it out.
o n Similar appearing vehicles may have different GVWRs
0 0 and payloads. Please note your vehicle’s
\SEE
\
FNER’S
MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. TI
I
CertificationjTire label or consult your dealer
for
additional details.

The Certification/Tire label is found on the driver’s door


edge, above the door latch.The label shows thesize of /A CAULON:
your original tires and the inflation pressures needed to
obtain the gross weight capacityof your vehicle. This is Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
called the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GVWR includes the weightof the vehicle, all occupants, GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle canbreak,
fuel, cargo and trailer tongue weight,if pulling a trailer. or it can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control.Also,
overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.

4-40
Using heavier suspension componentsto get added
durability might not change your weight ratings.Ask
your dealer to help you load your vehicle theright way.
Things you put inside yourvehicle can strike and
NOTICE: injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in
a crash.
Your warranty does not cover parts or 0 Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle.
components that failbecause of overloading. Try to spread theweight evenly.
0 Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,

If you put things inside your vehicle -- like suitcases, inside thevehicle so that someof them are
tools, packages, or anythingelse -- they will go as fast above the topsof the seats.
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly, 0 Don’t leave an unsecured child restraintin
or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going. your vehicle.
When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
Don’t leave a seat folded down unless you
need to.

There’s also important loading informationfor off-road


driving in this manual. See “Loading Your Vehicle for
Off-Road Driving” in the Index.

4-41
Payload Towing a Trailer
The payload capacity is shown on theCertificatiodTire
label. This is the maximum load capacity that your
vehicle can carry. Besure to include the weight of the CAUTION:
occupants as partof your load. If you added any
accessories or equipment after your vehicle left the If you don’t use the correct equipment and drive
factory, rememberto subtract the weight of these things properly, you can lose control when you pull a
from the payload.Your dealer can help you withthis. trailer. Forexample, if the trailer is too heavy, the
Add-on Equipment --
brakes may not work well or even at all. You
and your passengers couldbe seriously injured.
When you carry removable items, you may need to put a Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the
limit on how many people you carry inside your vehicle.
steps in thissection. Ask your dealerfor advice
Be sure to weigh your vehicle beforeyou buy and install
~

the new equipment. and information abouttowing atrailer with


~ your vehicle.

NOTICE:
NOTICE:
Your warranty doesn’t coverparts or
because of overloading.
components that fail Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your
vehicle and result incostly repairs not covered by
your warranty. To pull a trailercorrectly, follow
the advice in thispart, andsee your dealer for
important information abouttowing atrailer
with your vehicle.

4-42
Every Vehicle is ready for some trailer towing. If yours 0 Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
was built with trailering options, as many are, it’s ready (800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
for heavier trailers. But trailering is different than just axle or other parts could be damaged.
driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes 0 Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
in handling, durability and fuel economy. Successful, tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 k m h ) and
safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has tobe don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
used properly. engine and other parts of your vehicle wearin at the
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many heavier loads.
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules. 0 If you have an automatic transmission, you can
Many of these are important for your safety and that of use THIRD (3) (or, as you need to,a lower gear)
your passengers. So please read this section carefully when towing a trailer. Operating your vehicle in
before you pull a trailer. THIRD (3) when towing a trailer will minimize heat
If You Do DecideTo Pull A Trailer buildup and extend the life of your transmission. If
you have a manual transmission and you are towing
If you do, here are some important points:
a trailer, it’s better not to use FIFTH (5) gear. Just
0 There are many different laws, including speed limit drive in FOURTH (4) gear (or, asyou need to, a
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure lower gear).
your rig will be legal, not only where youlive but
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
also where you’ll bedriving. A good source for this
information can bestate or provincial police. 0 the weight of the trailer,
0 Consider using a sway control if your trailer will 0 the weight of the trailer tongue
weigh 2,000 lbs. (900 kg) or less. You should always 0 and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.
use a sway control if your trailer will weigh more
than 2,000 lbs. (900 kg). You can ask a hitch dealer
about sway controls.

4-43
Weight of the Trailer Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming the
driver andone passenger are in the tow vehicle and it
How heavy cana trailer safely be? has allthe required trailering equipment. The weight of
It depends on howyou plan to use your rig. For additional optional equipment, passengers andcargo in
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maximum
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer weight.
trailer are all important. And,it can also depend on any You can ask your dealerfor our trailering information or
special equipment that you haveon your vehicle. advice, or you can write us atthe address listed in your
The following chart shows how much your trailer can Warranty and Owner Assistance Information Booklet.
weigh, based upon your vehicle model and options. In Canada, write to:
Vehicle Axle Ratio Trailer Wt. General Motorsof Canada Limited
Customer CommunicationCentre
2-Wheel Drive, 3.08 4,500 lbs. (2 041 kg) 1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Auto. Trans. 3.42 5,500 lbs. (2 495 kg) Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
2-Wheel Drive, 3.424,500Ibs. (2 041 kg)
Manual Trans.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A)of any trailer is an important
4-Wheel Drive & 3.08 4,000 lbs. (1 814 kg) weight to measure becauseit affects the total or gross
All- Wheel Drive, 3.425,000 lbs. (2 268 kg) weight of your vehicle.The Gross Vehicle Weight
Auto. Trans. 3.73 5,000 lbs. (2 268kg) (GVW) includes thecurb weight of the vehicle, any
4-Wheel Drive & 3.42 4,000 Ibs. (1 8 14kg) cargo you may carry in it, and the people who willbe
All-Wheel Drive, riding in the vehicle. And if you will towa trailer, you
Manual Trans. must add the tongue loadto the GVW because your
vehicle will be carrying that weight,too. See “Loading
Your Vehicle” in the Indexfor more information about
your vehicle’s maximumload capacity.
4-44
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to theupper
limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Certificatioflire label on the driver’s door edge, above
the door latch, or see “Tire Loading” in the Index. Then
be sure you don’t goover the GVW limit for your
vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue.
Hitches
A B It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roadsare a
few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here are
some rules to follow:
If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will
If you’re usinga weight-carrying hitch, the trailer weigh more than 3,500 lbs. (1 589 kg), be sure to use
tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded a properly mounted, weight-distributing hitch and
trailer weight (B). If you’re using a weight-distributing sway control of the proper size. This equipment is
hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 12 percent of very important for proper vehicleloading and good
the total loaded trailer weight (B). handling when you’re driving.
After you’ve loaded yourtrailer, weigh the trailer and 0 Will you have to make any holes inthe body of your
then the tongue, separately,to see if the weights are vehicle when youinstall a trailer hitch?
proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer. If you do, then be sure to seal theholes later when
you remove thehitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly
carbon monoxide(CO) from yourexhaust can get
into your vehicle (see “Carbon Monoxide” in the
Index). Dirt and watercan, too.
4-45
Safety Chains Your trailer’s brake systemcan tap into the vehicle’s
hydraulic brake systemonly if
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer.Cross the safety chains under the tongue The trailer parts can withstand 3,000 psi
of the trailerso that the tongue will notdrop to the road (20 650 kPa) of pressure.
if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions The trailer’s brake system will useless than
about safety chains maybe provided by the hitch 0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s
manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the master cylinder. Otherwise, both braking systems
manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety won’t work well.You could evenlose your brakes.
chains and do not attach themto the bumper. Always
leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig. If everything checksout this far, then make the brake
And, never allow safety chainsto drag on the ground. fluid tap at the port on the master cylinder that sends
fluid to the rear brakes. But don’t use copper tubing for
Trailer Brakes this. If you do, it will bend and finally break
off. Use
steel brake tubing.
If your trailer weighs more than1,000 lbs. (450 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes -- and they must be
adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and
maintain them properly.

4-46
Driving with a Trailer Towing atrailer requires a certain amountof experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
I to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with thefeel of
A GA ‘TION: handling and braking with the added weightof the
trailer. And alwayskeep in mind that the vehicle you
are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearlyas
If you have a rear-mostwindow open andyou responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
pull a trailerwith your vehicle, carbon monoxide
(CO) could come into yourvehicle. You can’t see Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments), safetychains, electrical connector,
or smell CO. It can causeunconsciousness or
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment.If the trailer has
death. (See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.) To electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving an
maximize your safety when towing a trailer: then apply the trailer brakecontroller by hand to be sure
0 Have your exhaust system inspected for the brakes are working. This lets you check your
leaks, and make necessary repairs before electrical connection at the same time.
starting on your trip. During your trip, check occasionallyto be sure that the
Keep the rear-most windows closed. load is secure, and that the lamps andany trailer brakes
0 If exhaust does come into your vehicle are still working.
through a window in the rear or another
opening, drivewith your front, main Following Distance
heating orcooling systemon and with the Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle aheadas you
fan on any speed. This will bring fresh, would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This
outside air into yourvehicle. Do not use can help you avoidsituations that require heavy braking
MAX AfC because it only recirculates the and sudden turns.
air inside yourvehicle. (See “Comfort
Controls” in theIndex.)

4-47
Passing Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when When you tow a trailer, your vehicle hasto have extra
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’rea good wiring anda heavy-duty turn signal flasher (included in
deal longer, you’ll needto go much farther beyond the the optional trailering package).
passed vehicle beforeyou can return to your lane.
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash
Backing Up whenever you signal aturn or lane change. Properly
Hold the bottomof the steering wheel with one hand. hooked up, the trailer lamps willalso flash, telling other
Then, to move the trailerto the left,just move that hand drivers you’re aboutto turn, change lanesor stop.
to the left. To move thetrailer to the right, move your When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if panel will flashfor turns evenif the bulbs on the trailer
possible, have someone guide you. are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you
Making Turns are seeing your signal when theyare not. It’s important
to check occasionallyto be sure the trailer bulbsare
still working.
NOTICE:
Driving On Grades
Making very sharp turns while trailering could
before you start
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear
cause the trailerto come in contact with the down a longor steep downgrade. Ifyou don’t shift
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid down, you might have to use your brakesso much that
making very sharp turns while trailering. they would get hot and no longer work well.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than speed to around 45 mph (70 k m h ) to reduce the
normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders, possibility of engine and transmission overheating.
curbs, road signs, treesor other objects. Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal wellin advance.

4-48
If you have an automatic transmission,you should use But if you ever haveto park your rig on a hill, here’s
DRIVE (D) when towing a trailer. Operating your how to do it:
vehicle in DRIVE (D) when towing a trailer will 1 . Apply your regular brakes, but don’tshift into
minimize heat buildup and extend the life of your PARK (P) yet, or into gear for a manual
transmission. Or, if you have a manual transmission, transmission. Then turn your wheelsinto the curb if
it’s better not to use FIFTH ( 5 ) gear, just drive in facing downhill or into traffic if facing uphill.
FOURTH (4) gear (or, as you need to, a lower gear).
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a 3. When the wheel chocksare in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
lower temperature than at normalaltitudes. If you turn
your engine off immediatelyafter towing at high altitude 4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
on steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs parking brake, and then shiftinto PARK (P), or
similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the REVERSE (R) for a manual transmission.
engine run while parked (preferably on level ground) 5 . If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle with a
with the automatic transmission in PARK(P) (or the manual transfer case shift lever, be sure the transfer
manual transmission outof gear and the parking brake case is in a drive gear-- not in NEUTRAL (N).
applied) for a few minutes before turning the engine off. 6. Release the regular brakes.
If you do get the overheat warning, see “Engine
Overheating” in the Index. When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on Hills Parking ona Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
You really should not park yourvehicle, with a trailer
attached, on a hill. If something goes wrong, your rig while you:
could start to move. People canbe injured, and both 0 Startyourengine;
your vehicle andthe trailer can be damaged. 0 Shift into a gear; and
0 R.elease the parking brake.
4-49
2. Let up on the brake pedal. See “Fuses and Circuit Breakers”in the Index. Both
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks. harnesses haveno connector and shouldbe wired by a
qualified electrical technician.The technician can use
4. Stop and have someone pickup and store the chocks. the following color codechart when connecting the
wiring harnessto your trailer.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
0 Dark Blue: Usefor electric trailer brakes or
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re auxiliary wiring.
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedulefor more
on this. Things thatare especially important in trailer 0 Red: Use for battery charging;it connects to the
operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t starter solenoid (eight-wire harness only).
overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, belt, cooling system 0 Light Green: Back-up lamps (eight-wire
and brake adjustment. Eachof these is covered in this harness only).
manual, and the Index will helpyou find them quickly.
If you’re trailering, it’s agood idea to review these
0 Brown: Taillamps and parking lamps.
sections before you start your trip. 0 Yellow: Left stoplamp and turn signal.
Check periodicallyto see that all hitch nuts andbolts 0 Dark Green: Right stoplamp and turn signal.
are tight. 0 White (Heavy Gage): Ground wire.
Trailer WiringH-T---
ess 0 White (Light Gage): Auxiliary stoplamp.
The light duty trailer wir is a six-wire harness
assembly. The optional heavy-duty trailer wiringis an Securely attach the harnessto the trailer, then tape or
eight-wire harness assembly. The harnesses are stored strap it to your vehicle’s frame rail. Be sure you leave
under the vehicle, along the passenger-side frame it loose enoughso the wiring doesn’t bend or break,
crossmember on two-door vehicles or on the driver’s side but not so loose that it drags on the ground. Store the
corner frame rear crossmember on four-door vehicles. The harness in its original place. Wrap the harness together
heavy-duty trailer wiring has a 30-amp feed wire with an and tie it neatlyso it won’t be damaged.
inline fuse locatedby the junction block.
Section 5 Problems on the Road

Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road.

5-2 Hazard Warning Flashers 5-20 Engine FanNoise


5-3 Other Warning Devices 5-2 1 If a Tire Goes Flat
5-3 Jump Starting 5-2 1 Changing a Flat Tire
5-7 Towing Your Vehicle 5-34 Compact Spare Tire (If Equipped)
5- 12 Engine Overheating 5-35 If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow

5-1
Hazard Warning Flashers Press the button on top of
the steering column all the
way down t o make your
front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on andoff.

.....q
..

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what


position your keyis in, and evenif the key isn’tin,
To turn off the flashers, press the button until the first
click and release.
When the hazard warning flashersare on, your turn
signals won’t work.
Your hazard warning flasherslet you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front and
rear turn signal lamps will flash on and
off.

5-2
Other WarningDevices I

If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at


NOTICE:
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle. Ignoring these steps could result incostly damage
to yourvehicle that wouldn’t be covered by
Jump Starting your warranty.
If your battery has rundown, you may want to use Trying tostart your vehicle by pushing or pulling
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your it won’t work, andit could damage yourvehicle.
vehicle. But please use the following steps to do
it safely.
I . Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
IJTTT’Jr
- NOTICE:
Batteries can nurryou. They can De
dangerous because: If the othersystem isn’ta 12-volt systemwith a
They contain acid that can burnyou. negative ground, bothvehicles can be damaged.
They contain gas that canexplode or ignite. I

0 They contain enough electricity to


burn you.
If you don’t follow these stepsexactly, some or all
of these things can hurt you.

5-3
2. Get the vehiclesclose enough so the jumper cables 4. Open both hoods and locate the batteries. Find
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on
each other.If they are, it could cause a ground each battery.
connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to
start your vehicle, andthe bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems. AUTION:
I
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parlung brake firmly on both vehicles involved in Using a match near a battery can cause battery
the procedure. Put an automatic transmission vehicle gas toexplode. People have beenhurt doing this,
in PARK (P) and a manual transmission vehiclein and some havebeen blinded. Use a flashlightif
NEUTRAL (N). you need more light.
3. Turn off the ignition on bothvehicles. Unplug Be sure the battery has enough water. You don’t
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette need to add water to the ACDelco Freedom@
lighter, or accessory poweroutlets, if you have this battery installed in everynew GM vehicle. But if
option. Turn off all lamps thataren’t needed as well a battery has fillercaps, besure the right amount
as radios. This will avoid sparks and help save both
batteries. In addition, it could save your radio! of fluid is there. If it islow, add water to take care
of that first.If you don’t, explosive gas could
be present.
NOTICE: Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
If you leave your radio on, it couldbe badly your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
damaged. The repairwouldn’t be coveredby water and get medical help immediately.
your warranty.

5-4
5. Check that thejumper cables don’t have looseor 7. Don’t let the other end
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock. touch metal. Connect it
The vehicles could be damagedtoo. to the positive (+)
Before you connect the cables, here are some basic terminal of the
things you should know. Positive(+) will go to good battery.
positive (+) and negative (-) will go to a metal
engine part. Don’t connect positive (+) to
negative (-) or you’ll get a short that would damage
the battery and maybe otherparts too.
6. Connect the red
positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal of
the vehicle with the 8. Now connect the black
dead battery. negative (-) cable to
the good battery’s
negative (-) terminal.
Don’t let the other end
touch anything until the
next step. The other end
of the negative cable
doesn’t go to the dead
battery. It goesto a
heavy unpainted metal
part on theengine of the
vehicle with the
dead battery.

5-5
9. Attach the cable at least 12. Remove the cables in reverse orderto prevent
18 inches (45 cm) away electrical shorting. Take care that they don’t touch
from the dead battery, each other or any other metal.
but not nearengine parts
that move.
The electrical
connection isjust as
good there, but the
chance of sparks getting
back to the battery is
much less.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery andrun
the engine for awhile.
11. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery.If it
won’t start aftera few tries, make sure all
connections are good.If it still won’t start, it
probably needs service.
A. Heavy Metal Engine Part
B. Good Battery
C. Dead Battery

Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you


badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once theengiv is running.

5-6
Towing Your Vehicle Whether you can move the shift lever for the
transmission and shift the transfer case, if you
Try to have a GM dealer or aprofessional towing have one.
service tow your vehicle. See “Roadside Assistance” in
the Index. If there was an accident, what was damaged.
If your vehicle has been changed since it was When the towing service arrives, let the tow operator
factory-new by adding things like fog lamps, aero know that this manual contains these towing
skirting, or special tires and wheels, these instructions instructions. The operator may want to see them.
may not be correct.
Before you do anything, turn on the hazard
warning flashers.
When you call, tell the towing service:
Whether your vehicle has rear-wheel drive,
four-wheel drive or all-wheel drive.
The make, model and year of your vehicle.

5-7
’ A CAUTION: 1
I

To help avoidinjury to you or others: A vehicle can fall from acar carrierif it isn’t
0 Never let passengersride ina vehicle that is adequately secured. This can cause a collision,
being towed. serious personal injury and vehicle damage. The
Never tow faster than safe or posted speeds. vehicle should be tightly secured with chains or
Never tow with damagedparts not f d y secured. steel cables beforeit is transported.
0 Never get under your vehicle after it has Don’t usesubstitutes (ropes, leather straps,
been liftedby the tow truck. canvas webbing, etc.)that can be cut by sharp
Always use separate safety chains on each edges underneath the towed vehicle. Always use
side when towinga vehicle. T-hooks inserted in the T-hook slots. Never use
0 Never use J-hooks. Use T-hooks instead. J-hooks. They will damagedrivetrain and
suspension components.

5-8
When your vehicle is being towed, have the ignition key 3. Move the solenoid lever
turned to the OFF position. The steering wheel should toward the driver’s side
be clamped in a straight-ahead position with a clamping to unlock it.
device designed for towing service. Do not use the
vehicle’s steering column lock for this. The transmission
should be inNEUTRAL (N) and the transfer case, if you
have one, should be in 2HI. The parking brake should
be released.
If your vehicle hasa floor-mounted shifter and no
electrical power, the electrical solenoid lock mustbe
overridden to shift from PARK (P) to NEUTRAL (N).
Follow these steps:
1. Push the base of the shift lever boot forward with 4. While holding the solenoid lever in the unlock
your thumb. position, press the shift lever button and shift into
2. Lift the boot and find the white solenoid lever. NEUTRAL (N).
5. Release the solenoid lever and snap the boot back
into place.
Don’t have your vehicle towed on the drive wheels
unless you must. If the vehicle mustbe towed on the
drive wheels, be sure to follow the speed anddistance
restrictions later in this section or your transmission will
be damaged. If these limitations must be exceeded, then
the drive wheels have to be supported ona dolly.

5-9
Front Towing
Tow Limits -- 35 mph (55 k d ) , 50 miles (80 km) NOTICE:
Vehicles with the all-wheel drive or four-wheel drive Do not tow with sling-type equipment or
with the electronic transfer case option must use a fascidfog lamp damagewill occur. Usewheel-lift
towing dolly under the rearwheels when towing from
or car-carrier equipment. Additional ramping
the front.
may be required for car-carrier equipment. Use
safety chains andwheel straps.
Towing a vehicle over rough surfacescould
damage avehicle. Damage can occur fromvehicle
to ground orvehicle to wheel-lift equipment. To
help avoid damage, installa towing dolly and
raise thevehicle until adequate clearanceis
obtained between the ground and/or
wheel-lift equipment.
Do not attachwinch cables or J-hooks to
suspension componentswhen using car-carrier
equipment. Always use T-hooks inserted in the
T-hook slots.

5-10
Rear Towing
Tow Limits -- 35 mph (56 k h ) , 50 miles (80 km) NOTICE:
Vehicles with the all-wheel drive or four-wheeldrive Do not tow with sling-typeequipment or rear
with the electronic transfer case option must use a bumper valance damage will occur. Use wheel-lift
towing dolly under the front wheels when towing from
or car-carrier equipment. Additional ramping
the reaE
may be required for car-carrierequipment. Use
safety chains and wheel straps.
Towing a vehicle over roughsurfaces could
damage avehicle. Damagecan occur from vehicle
k3? to ground or vehicle to wheel-lift equipment.
Unless you have all-wheeldrive, to help avoid
damage, install a towing dollyand raise the
vehicle until adequate clearance is obtained
between the ground and/or wheel-lift equipment.
Do not attach winch cablesor J-hooks to
suspension componentswhen usingcar-carrier
equipment. Always use T-hooksinserted in the
T-hook slots.

5-11
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gageon your
vehicle’s instrument panel.See “Gages” in the Index.
Steam from an overheated engine canburn you
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away
from the vehicle until it cools down. Waituntil
there is no signof steam or coolant beforeyou
open the hood.
If you keepdriving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids init can catch fire.You or
others could be badlyburned. Stop your engineif
it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.

I NOTICE: I
If your engine catchesfire because you keep
driving with no coolant,your vehicle can be
badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.

5-12
If No Steam Is Coming FromYour Engine If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If you get the overheat warning but see or hear no If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can
steam, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes drive normally.
the enginecan get a littletoo hot when you:
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
Climb a long hill on a hot day. vehicle right away.
Stop after high-speed driving. If there’s still no signof steam, push the accelerator until
Idle for long periods in traffic. the engine speed is about twice as fast as normal idle
0 Tow a trailer. See “Driving on Grades” in the Index. speed. Bring the engine speed backto normal idle speed
after two or three minutes. Now see if the warning stops.
If you get the overheat warning with no signof steam, But then, if you still have the warning,turn ofSthe
try this for aminute or so: engine and get everyoneout of the vehicle until it
1. Turn off your air conditioner. cools down.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
speed and open the windowas necessary, help right away.
3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);
otherwise, shift to the highest gear while
driving -- DRIVE (D) or THIRD (3) for
automatic transmissions.

5-13
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what
you’ll see:

i
The coolant level should be at least up to the
ADD mark.
A. Coolant Recovery Tank If it isn’t, you may have a leak in the radiator hoses,
heater hoses, radiator, waterpump or somewhere else in
B. Radiator Pressure Cap the cooling system.
C. Engine Fan
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is
boiling,
don’t do anything else until it cools down.

5-14
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
A CAUTION: Recovery Tank
If you haven’t founda problem yet, butthe coolant level
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine isn’t at the ADD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean
parts, can be very hot. Don’ttouch them. If you water (preferably distilled) and DEX-COOL@engine
do, youcan be burned. coolant at the coolant recovery tank. (See “Engine
Coolant” in the Index for more information.)
Don’t run the engine if there is a leak.If you run
the engine, it could loseall coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could beburned.
Get any leak fixed beforeyou drive the vehicle.
Adding onlyplain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid like alcohol, can boil before
the proper
NOTICE: coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant
warning system isset for the proper coolant
Engine damage from running your engine mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture,
without coolant isn’t coveredby your warranty. your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t
get the overheat warning. Your engine could
If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again. See catch fire and you or others could beburned.
if the engine cooling fan speed increases when idle Use a 50EO mixture of clean water and
speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal down. DEX-COOL@coolant.
If it doesn’t, your vehicle needs service. Turn off
the engine.

5-15
~~

NOTICE:
In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the You can be burnedif you spill coolanton hot
engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
Use the recommended coolant and the proper and itwill burn if the engine parts are hot
coolant mixture. enough. Don’t spill coolanton a hot engine.

When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank


is atthe
ADD mark, start your vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues, there’sone more
thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant
mixture directlyto the radiator, but besure the cooling
system is cool before youdo it.

5-16
J- IW to Add Coolant to the Radiator

Steam and scalding liquids from a coolinghot


system canblow out and burnyou badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
-- --
pressure cap even a little they cancome out
at high speed. Never turn the capwhen the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for thecooling system and
radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have to
turn the pressurecap.

1. You can remove the pressure cap when the cooling


system, including the pressurecap and upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise until it first stops, (Don’t press
down while turning the pressurecap.)
If you hear a hiss, waitfor that to stop. A hiss means
there is still some pressure left.

5-17
2. Then keep turning the pressurecap, but now push 3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL@
down as you turn it. Remove the pressurecap. coolant mixture, upto the base of the filler neck.
(See “Engine Coolant” in the Indexfor more
information about the proper coolant mixture.)

5-18
4. Then fill the coolant recovery tankto ADD mark. 6. Start the engine and let it run untilyou can feel the
upper radiator hosegetting hot. Watch outfor the
5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but
engine cooling fan.
leave the pressurecap off.
7 . By this time, the coolant levelinside the radiator
filler neck may be lower.If the level is lower, add
more of the properDEX-COOL@coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches the
base of the filler neck.

5-19
Engine Fan Noise
This vehicle has a clutched engine coolingfan. When
the clutch is engaged, the fanspins faster to provide
more air to cool the engine.In most everyday driving
conditions, the clutch is not engaged. This improves fuel
economy and reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicle
loading, trailer towing and/or high outside temperatures,
the fan speed increases when the clutch engages. So you
may hear an increasein fan noise. This is normal and
should not be mistaken as the transmission slippingor
making extra shifts. It is merely the cooling system
functioning properly. The fan will slow down when
additional cooling isnot required and the
clutch disengages.
8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during You may also hear this fan noise when you start the
this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the engine. It willgo away as the fan clutch disengages.
filler neck, reinstall the pressurecap. Be sure the
arrows on the pressurecap line up like this.

5-20
If a Tire Goes Flat Changing a Flat Tire
It’s unusualfor a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving, If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheeldamage
especially if you maintain yourtires properly. If air goes by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly. warning flashers.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few
tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a fronttire fails, the flat tire will create adrag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Changing a tire can cause an injury, The vehicle
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to can slipoff the jack and roll overyou or other
a stopwell out of the traffic lane. people. You and they could be badlyinjured.
H rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a Find a level place to change your tire.To help
skid and mayrequire the same correction you’d use in a prevent thevehicle from moving:
skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the 1. Set the parking brakefirmly.
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by 2. Put an automatic transmission shift
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
lever inPARK (P)or shift a manual
very bumpy and noisy, but you canstill steer. Gently
brake to a stop-- well off the road if possible. transmission to FIRST (1) or
REVERSE (R).
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your 3. Thrn off the engine.
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely. 4. Put thewheel blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the
one being changed.That would be the
tire on the other sideof the vehicle, at
the opposite end.

5-21
The following instructions explain howto remove the
spare tire, depending on whereit is mounted on
The following steps will tellyou how to use thejack and your vehicle.
change a tire.
and Tools
Removing the Spare Tire
The jacking equipment you’ll needis stored along the
I NOTICE:
driver’s side inner rear quarter panels.In some cases, Never remove or restowa tire frondtoa stowage
you may have to remove the sparetire in order to reach position under the vehicle while the vehicle is
the jack. Your vehicle is also equipped with work gloves supported by a jack. Always tighten the tire
and a plastic ground mat to assist in the changingof a fully against the undersideof the vehicle
flat tire. when restowing.

5-22
To remove the
underbody-mounted spare,
insert the chisel end of the
I NOTICE:
- ~~

wheel wrench, on an angle, To help avoid vehicle damage,do not drive the
into the hole in the rear
vehicle before the cableis properly stored.
bumper. Be sure the chisel
end of the wheel wrench
connects into the hoist shaft. If you have an inside-mounted spare tire, the tire must
be removed in order to have access to the jack storage.
10 remove an inside-mounted spare tire, reachinto your
of the
tire’s cover and unscrew the wing nut at the center
wheel. Remove it and the retainer. Unhook the tire from
the mounting bracket and remove the cover.
Turn the wheel wrench to the left to lower the spare tire.
Keep turning the wheel wrench until the spare
tire can To remove a rear-mounted spare tire, first make sure
be pulled out from under the vehicle. that the carrier arm is fully-latched to the endgate. Then
remove the sparetire cover.
When the tirehas been completely lowered, tilt the
retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the
wheel opening. Pull the tire out from under the vehicle.

5-23
The locking wheel nut can
be removed by snapping the
rubber weathercover off the
' face of the lock case.

Insert the key and pull the


lock case straight off. It is
The tools you'll be using includethe jack (A) and wheel
not necessary to turn
wrench (B). Your vehicle may also have an optional hub
the key.
cap removal tool.

Put the spare tire near the flat tire.

5-24
Position the chisel end of your wheel wrench in the If you have individual wheel nut capsthat cover each
notch of the hub cap and pry off the hubcap. nut, they mustbe removed in order to get to the wheel
of the wheel wrenchto remove
nuts. Use the socket end
Some of the moldedplastic hub capshave imitation the wheel nutcaps.
wheel nuts molded into them. The wheel wrench won’t
fit these imitation nuts,so don’t try to remove them with Your wheel nut caps may attach your hubcap to the
the socket endof the wheel wrench. wheel. Remove these wheel nut caps before you take
the hub cap.

5-25
Removing theFlat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire

A. Front Frame Hole


B. Rear Frame Hole (2-Door) or Spring Hanger
Hole
(4-Door)
1. Using the wheel wrench, loosen all the wheel nuts.
Don’t remove them yet.
2. Turn the jack handle to the right to raise the jack
lift head.
3. Fit the jack into the appropriate hole nearest the
flat tire.

5-26
Getting undera vehicle when it is jacked upis
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack,you
could be badlyinjured or killed. Never getunder
a vehicle when it issupported only by a jack.

r-Raising yourvehicle with the jack improperly


4. Raise the vehicleby turning the jack handle to the
positioned can damage thevehicle and even make
right. Raise the vehiclefar enough off the ground so
the vehicle fall. To help avoid personalinjury and there is enough room for the spare tireto fit.
vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head
into the proper location before raising 5. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.
l the vehicle.

5-27
6. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces and I
spare wheel.
Never use oil or grease onstuds ornuts. If you
do, the nuts mightcome loose. Your wheelcould
fall off, causing a serious accident.

7. Place the spare on the wheel mounting surface.


Put the nutson by hand.
Make sure the
cone-shaped end is
toward the wheel.
Tighten each nut by
1st or dirton the w ,el,or on the parts to hand until the wheelis
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts held against the hub.If a
become loose after a time. The wheel could come nut can’t be turned by
off and cause anaccident. When you change a hand, use the wheel
wheel, remove any rust or dirt from the places wrench and see your
where thewheel attaches to thevehicle. In an dealer as soon
emergency, you can use a clothor a paper towel as possible.
to do this; but be sure touse a scraper orwire
brush later,if you need to, to get allthe rust or
dirt off.

5-28
. .
10. Use the wrench to
tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown.

9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle to the


left. Lower the jack completely.

5-29
I Storing a Flat or Spare Tire andTools
I
A CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or Improperly tightened &!, CAUTION:
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose
and even come off. This could lead to an accident. Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the
Be sure touse the correct wheel nuts. If you have passenger compartmentof the vehicle could
to replace them,be sure toget new GM original cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment wheel nuts. equipment could strikesomeone. Store all these
in the proper place.
Stop somewhereas soon asyou can and have the
nuts tightened with a torque wrenchto 100 Ib-ft
(140 N-m).

I NOTICE: I
Improperly tightened wheel nuts canlead to
brake pulsation and rotor damage.To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten thewheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification.

5-30
Follow this diagram to store the underbody-mounted 1. Put the tire on the ground at therear of the vehicle,
spare. with the valve stem pointed down andto the rear.
2. Pull the retainer through the wheel.
A.Retainer
3. Put the chisel end of the wheel wrench, on an angle,
B. Valve Stem (Pointeci Down) through the hole in therear bumper and into the hoist
C. Spare or Flat Tire shaft. Turn the wheel wrench to the right until the
tire is raised against the undersideof the vehicle.
D. Spring
E. Wheel Wrench You will hear two “clicks” when thetire is secure.
but pull on the tire to make sure.
F. Lower
G. Raise
H. Hoist Arm

5-31
Follow this diagram for the inside-mounted spare. Follow this diagram for the rear-mounted spare.

C7

A. Spare or Flat Tire A. Wheel Carrier


B. Retainer B. Spare or Flat Tire
C. Nut C. Wheel Nut and Locking Nut Cylinder
D. Wheel Carrier
E. Hook

5-32
Reinstall the locking wheel nut using the wheel wrench.
Then push the lockcase onto the lug nut untilit stops. /-A
The key does not have to be inserted into the lock. Push
the lock case to be sure it issecured. The special lug nut
and lock case is not intended to be used on any road
wheel, only on the spare wheel carrier. Tightenthe nuts
on the wheelcarrier to 22 to 32 lb-ft (30 to 40 Nem).
Return thejack, wheel wrench and wheel blocksto the
proper location in your vehicle’srear area. Secure the
items and replace thejack cover.

A. Retainer
B. Rubber Band (Some Models)
C. Work Gloves
D. Mat
E. Jack Storage Cover
E WheelBlocks
G. Hub Cap Removal Tool (Some Models)
H. Wheel Wrench
I. Jack
J. JackingInstructions

5-33
’ CAUTION: NOTICE:
When the compact spare is installed, don’ttake
Make sure the tire and carrier aresecure.
Driving with thetire or carrierunlatched could your vehicle through an automatic car wash with
injure pedestrians or damage the vehicle. guide rails.The compact spare can get caught on
the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel,
and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
Compact Spare Tire(If Equipped)
Although the compactspare tire was fully inflated when Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles.
your vehicle was new, it canlose air after a time. Check And don’tmix your compact sparetire or wheel with
the inflation pressure regularly. It should be60 psi other wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your spare
(420 kPa). tire and its wheel together.
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle,
you should stop as soon as possible and makesure
your spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact NOTICE:
spare is made to perform well at speeds upto 65 mph
(105 W h ) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare.Using
so you can finish your trip and have your full-sizetire them can damage your vehicle and can damage
repaired or replaced where you want. Of course, it’sbesf the chains too. Don’t use tire chains on your
to replace your spare with full-size
a tire as soon as you compact spare.
can. Your spare will last longer and be in good shape in
case you needit again.

5-34
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice Snow
or 1 NOTICE: I
What you don’t wantto dowhen your vehicle is stuck is Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your
to spin your wheelstoo fast. Themethod known as vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the wheels
“rocking” can help you get out when you’restuck, but too fast while shifting your transmission back
you must use caution.
and forth, you can destroy your transmission.

For information about usingtire chains on your vehicle,


see “Tire Chains” in the Index.
If you let your tires s p ~ n high
a t speed, theycan
explode, and you or others could beinjured. And
the transmission or other parts of the vehicle can
overheat. That could causean engine
compartment fire or other damage. When you’re
stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible. Don’t
spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as show]
on the speedometer.

5-35
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out Using the Kecovery Hooks
First, turn your steering wheelleft and right. That will
clear the area around yourfront wheels. If you have a
four-wheel drive vehicle,shift into 4HI. Then shift back
and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear(or
with a manual transmission, between FIRST (1) or
SECOND (2) and REVERSE (R)), spinning the wheels
as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal while
you shift, and presslightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transmission is in gear. If that doesn’t get you
out after a few tries, you may needto be towed out. Or,
you can use your recovery hooks if your vehicle has
them. If you do need to be towed out, see “Towing Your
Vehicle” inthe Index.

Your vehicle may be equipped with recovery hooks.The


recovery hooks are provided at thefront of your vehicle.
You may need to use themif you’re stuck off-road
and need to be pulledto some place where youcan
continue driving.

5-36
The recovery hooks, when used, are undera lot of
force. Always pull thevehicle straight out. Never
pull on the hooksat a sideways angle. The hooks
could break off and you or otherscould be
injured from the chain or cable snapping back.
I

NOTICE:
Never use the recovery hooks to tow the vehicle.
Your vehicle could be damaged and itwould not
be covered by warranty.

5-37
fi NOTES

5-38
Section 6 Service and Appnara--~2 Care

Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle. This section begins withservice and fuel information,
and then itshows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels. There is also technical information about your
vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care.

6-2 Service 6-28 Windshield Washer Fluid


6-3 Fuel 6-29 Brakes
6-5 Fuels in Foreign Countries 6-32 Battery
6-5 Filling Your Tank 6-33 Bulb Replacement
6-7 Filling a Portable Fuel Container 6-38 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
6-8 Checking Things Under the Hood 6-40 Tires
6-10 Engine Oil 6-49 Appearance Care
6- 14 Air Cleaner 6-50 Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
6-15 Automatic Transmission Fluid 6-52 Care of Safety Belts
6-1 9 Manual Transmission Fluid 6-54 Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
6-20 Hydraulic Clutch 6-57 Appearance Care Materials Chart
6-2 1 Rear Axle 6-58 Vehicle Identification Number (VTN)
6-22 Four-wheel Drive 6-58 Service Parts Identification Label
6-23 Engine Coolant 6-58 Electrical System
6-26 Radiator Pressure Cap 6-64 Replacement Bulbs
6-27 Thermostat 6-64 Capacities and Specifications
6-27 Power Steering Fluid 6-65 Air Conditioning Refrigerants
Service Doing Your Own Service Work
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll
be happy withit. We hope you’ll go to your dealer for want to use the proper GMService Manual. Ittells you
all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts and much more about howto service your vehicle than this
GM-trained and supportedservice people. manual can. To order the proper service manual,see
“Service and Owner Publications” in the Index.
We hope you’ll want tokeep your GM vehicle allGM.
Genuine GM parts haveone of these marks: Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attemptingto
do your own service work,see “Servicing Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the dateof any service work you
Genuine perform. See “Maintenance Record”in the Index.

6-2
/!\ CAUTION: Use regular unleadedgasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher. At a minimum, it should meetspecifications
You can be injured and your vehicle could be ASTM D48 14 inthe United States and CGSB 3.5-M93
damaged if you try to do service work on a in Canada. Improved gasoline specifications have
vehicle without knowing enoughabout it. been developed by the American Automobile
Manufacturers Association (AAMA) for better
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge, vehicle performance and engine protection. Gasolines
experience, the proper replacement parts meeting the AAMAspecification could provide
and tools before youattempt any vehicle improved driveability and emission control system
maintenance task. protection compared to other gasolines.
Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
Be sure the posted octane is at least 87. If the octane is
other fasteners. “English” and “metric” less than 87, you may geta heavy knocking noise when
fasteners can be easily confused.If you use you drive. If it’s bad enough, it can damage yourengine.
the wrong fasteners, parts can later break
or fall off. You could be hurt. If you’re using fuel rated at 87 octane or higher and you
hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service. But
don’t worry if you hear a little pinging noise when
Adding Equipmentto the Outside of you’re accelerating or driving up a hill. That’s normal,
and you don’t haveto buy a higher octane fuel to get rid
Your Vehicle of pinging. It’s the heavy, constant knock that means
Things you might add tothe outside of your vehicle can you have a problem.
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise
and affect windshield washer performance. Check with
your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of
your vehicle.

6-3
If your vehicleis certified to meet California Emission To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
Standards (indicated onthe underhood emission control are now required to containadditives that will help
label), it is designedto operate on fuels that meet prevent deposits from forming in yourengine and fuel
California specifications. If such fuels are not available system, allowing your emission control system to
in states adopting California emissions standards, your function properly.Therefore, you should not haveto
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting add anythingto the fuel. In addition, gasolines
federal specifications, but emission control system containing oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and
performance may be affected.The malfunction indicator reformulated gasolines may be available in your areato
lamp on your instrument panel may turn on and/or your help clean the air. General Motors recommends that you
vehicle may faila smog-check test. If this occurs, return use these gasolinesif they comply with the
to your authorizedGM dealer for diagnosis to determine specifications described earlier.
the cause of failure. In the event it is determined that the
cause of the condition is the type of fuels used, repairs
may notbe covered by your warranty. NOTICE:
Some gasolines thatare not reformulatedfor low
emissions contain an octane-enhancing additive called Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT); contains methanol. Don’tuse it. It can corrode
ask yourservice station operator whether or not hisfuel metal parts in your fuel system and also damage
contains MMT. General Motors does not recommend the plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t
use of such gasolines.If fuels containing MMT are used, be covered under your warranty.
spark plug life may be reduced and your emission
control system performancemay be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel
may turn on.If this occurs, return to your authorized
GM dealer for service.

6-4
Fuels in Foreign Countries Filling Your Tank
If you plan ondriving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard to
find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in theprevious text on fuel. Costly repairs
caused by use of improperfuel wouldn’t becovered by
your warranty.
To check on fuel availability, ask anauto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you’llbe driving.
You can also write us at the following address for
advice. Just tell us where you’re going and give your
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
General Motors Overseas Distribution Corporation
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 The fuel cap is behind a hinged door on the driver’s side
of your vehicle.

6-5
To remove thecap, turn it slowly to the left
A CAUTION: (counterclockwise). The cap has a spring in it; if you let
go of the cap too soon, it will spring back to the right.
Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. It burns
violently, and that can causevery bad injuries.
Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling I
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking
If you get gasoline on yourselfand then
materials away from gasoline.
something ignites it, you could be badly burned.
Gasoline can spray out on you if you open the
fuel fillercap too quickly. This spraycan happen
if your tankis nearly full, andis more likely in
hot weather. Open the fuel filler cap slowly and
wait for any“hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew
the capall the way.

Be careful notto spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from


painted surfaces as soon as possible.See “Cleaning the
Outside of Your Vehicle” in the Index.

While refueling, hang the


cap by the tether from the
hook on thefiller door.

6-6
When you put the cap back on, turn it tothe right Filling a Portable Fuel Container
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make
sure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel caphas been left off or
improperly installed. This would allow fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere. See “Malfunction
Indicator Lamp” in theIndex. Never filla portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the gasoline vapor.You can
NOTICE: be badlyburned and your vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoidinjury to you and others:
If you need a new cap, be sure toget the right Dispense gasoline only into approved
type. Yourdealer can get onefor you. If you get containers.
the wrong type,it may not fit properly. This may Do not fill acontainer while it is inside a
cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
and your fuel tank andemissions system may be on any surface other than the ground.
damaged. See “MalfunctionIndicator Lamp” in Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
the Index. inside of the fill opening beforeoperating
the nozzle. Contact should bemaintained
until the filling is complete.
Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline.

6-7
Checking ThingsUnder the Hood Then go to the front of the vehicle and release the
secondary hood release.

'A
I
CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like
gasoline,
oil, coolant, brake fluid,windshield washer and
other fluids, and plasticor rubber. You or others
could be burned. Be careful not to dropor spill
things thatwill burn ontoa hot engine.

To open the hood,first pull


the handleinside the vehicle
on the lower driver's side of
the instrument panel. Lift the hood, release the hood prop from its retainer and
You may
put the hood prop into the slot in the hood.
have a lamp that comes on when you lift the hood.
When you lift the hood, you’ll see these items:

A. Battery E Power Steering Reservoir


8. Coolant Recovery Tank G. Brake Master Cylinder
C. Engine Oil Dipstick H. Air Cleaner
D. Engine Oil Fill I. Fuse Block
E. Transmission Dipstick J. Windshield Washer Fluid
6-9
Before closing the hood,be sure all thefiller caps are on Engine Oil
properly. Then lift the hoodto relieve pressure on the
hood prop. It’s a good ideato check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, theoil must
Remove the hood prop from the slot in the hood and be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
return the prop toits retainer.
Then just pull the hood down firmly
to close. It will The oil dipstick is a
latch when dropped from10 to12 inches (25 to 30 cm) yellow ring.
without pressingon the hood. Turn off the engine and
give the oila few minutes
to drain backinto the oil
pan. If you don’t, the oil
dipstick might not show
the actual level.

6-10
Checking EngineOil When to Add Engine Oil
Pull out thedipstick and clean it with a paper towel or If the oil is at or below the ADD line, then you’ll need
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again, to add at leastone quart of oil. But you must usethe
keeping the tip down, and check the level. right kind. This part explains what kind of oil to use. For
crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and Specifications”
in the Index.

NOTICE:
Don’t add too much oil. If your engine hasso
much oil that the’oillevel gets above the
cross-hatched area thatshows the proper
operating range,your engine could be damaged.

Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in


the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the way
back in whenyou’re through.

6-11
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use RECOMMENDED SAE VlSCOSlN GRADE ENGINE OILS
Oils recommendedfor your vehicle canbe identified FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING, SELECT THE LOWEST
by looking for the “Starburst” symbol. This symbol SAL VlSCOSlN GRADE OIL FOR THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE.
indicates that the oil has been certified
by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use any oilwhich
does not carry this Starburst symbol.
LOOK
HOT FOR THIS
WEATHER SYMBOL
If you change your ownoil,
be sure you use oil that has /.Frl/)
the Starburst symbol on the
front of the oil container.

-- SAE 1OW-30

If you have your oilchanged for you, be surethe oil


put into your engine is American Petroleum Institute SAE 5W-30

certified for gasoline engines.


i PREFERRED

You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your COLD
vehicle, as shownin the following chart: WEATHER
DO NOT USE SAE 2OW-50 OR ANY OTHER
GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED

6-12
As shown in the chart, SAE 5W-30 is best for your When to Change EngineOil
vehicle. However, you can useSAE 1OW-30 if it’s going
to be 0”F (- 18O C) or above. These numbers on anoil If any one of these is true foryou, use the short tripkity
container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use maintenance schedule:
other viscosity oils, such as S A E 20W-50. 0 Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).
This is particularly important when outside
temperatures are below freezing.
NOTICE: 0 Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum 0 You operate your vehicle in dusty areas or off-road
Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines frequently.
“Starburst” symbol. Failure to use the 0 You frequently tow a trailer or uSe a carrier on top of
recommended oil can result in engine damage not your vehicle.
covered by your warranty. 0 The vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi
or other commercial application.
GM Goodwrench@oil meets all the requirements for Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to
your vehicle. break down sooner.If any one of these is true for your
If you are in an area where the temperature falls below vehicle, then you needto change your oil and filter
-20°F (-29”C), consider using either an SAE 5W-30 every 3,000 miles (5 000 km)or 3 months -- whichever
synthetic oil or an SAE OW-30 oil. Both will provide occurs first.
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine If none of them is true, use the long triphighway
at extremely lowtemperatures. maintenance schedule. Change the oil and filter every
7,500 miles (12 500 km)or 12 months -- whichever
Engine Oil Additives occurs first. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed
Don’t add anything to your oil. Your dealer is ready to engine under highway conditions causes engine oil to
advise if you think something should be added. break down slower.
6-13
Remote Oil Filter(Four-wheel Drive) Air Cleaner
The access door for theremote oil filter is
in the steering
linkage shield assemblylocated under the radiator
support. Twist the screwto unlock or lock the door.
If you openthe door, make sure it is securely closed
when you are finished.

What to Do with Used Oil


Did you know that usedengine oil contains certain
elements that may be unhealthyfor your skin and could
even cause cancer? Don’tlet used oil stay on your skin
for very long. Clean yourskin and nails withsoap and
water, or a good hand cleaner. Washor properly throw
away clothing or rags containing used engine oil. (See
the manufacturer’s warningsabout the use and disposal
of oil products.)
Used oil can bea real threat to the environment. If you To remove the air cleaner, removethe wing nuts that
change your own oil, be sure to all free-flowing oil hold the cover on. Remove the cover and lift Out the
from the filter before disposal. Don’tever dispose of oil air
by putting it in the trash,-pouring it on the ground, into Insert a new air filter, then replace the air cleaner cowx.
sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, Tighten the wing nuts to hold the cover in place.
recycle it by taking it to a place thatcollects used oil. If
you have a problem properly disposingof your usedoil,
ask your dealer,a service station or a local recycling
center for help.

6-14
Automatic Transmission Fluid
When to Check and Change
Operating the engine withthe air cleaner off can A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
cause you or others tobe burned. The air cleaner level is when the engine oil ischanged.
not only cleansthe air, it stops flameif the engine Change both the fluid and filter every 15,000 miles
backfires. If it isn’t there,and theengine (25 000 km)if the vehicle is mainly driven under one
backfires, you could beburned. Don’t drive with or more of these conditions:
it off, and be careful working onthe engine with 0 In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
the air cleaner off. regularly reaches 90°F (32”C) or higher.
0 In hilly or mountainous terrain.
0 When doing frequent trailer towing.
NOTICE: Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
If the air cleaner is off, a backfire can cause a conditions, change the fluidand filter every
damaging engine fire. And,dirt can easily get 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
into your engine, which willdamage it. Always See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
have the air cleaner in place when you’re driving.

6-15
How to Check Wait at least30 minutes before checkingthe
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you
may choose to have this done at your GM dealership When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
Service Department. At high speed for quite a while.
If you do it yourself, be sureto follow all the instructions In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather.
here, or you could geta false reading on the dipstick.
0 While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at
NOTICE: normal operating temperature, whichis 180°F to 200°F
(82”C to 93 “ C ) .See “Checking Transmission Fluid
~ Too much or too little fluid can damageyour Hot” in the Index.
transmission. Too much can mean that some of
the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
a fire. Be
parts or exhaust system parts, starting
sure to get an accurate reading if you check your
transmission fluid.

6-16
Checking Transmission FluidHot Checking the Fluid Hot or Cold
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles 0 Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
(24 km)when outside temperatures are above 50°F running.
(10°C). If it's colder than 50°F (lO"C), drive the 0 With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
vehicle in THIRD (3) until the enginetemperature gage in PARK (P).
moves and thenremains steady for 10 minutes. Then
follow the hot check procedures. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
Checking Transmission Fluid Cold three seconds in eachrange. Then, position the shift
A cold check is made after the vehicle has beensitting lever in PARK (P).
for eight hours or more withthe engine off and is used Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
only as a reference. Let the engine run at idle for five
minutes if outside temperatures are 50°F (10°C) or Then, without shuttingoff the engine, follow these steps:
more. If it's colder than 50°F ( lO"C), you may haveto
1. Flip the handle up and
idle the engine longer. Should the fluid level be low
then pull out the dipstick
during a cold check, you must perform a hot check
and wipe it with a clean
before adding fluid. This will give you a more accurate
rag or paper towel.
reading of the fluid level.

6-17
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and How to Add Fluid
then pull it back out again.
Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
Add fluid only after checkingthe transmission fluid
while it ishot. (A cold checkis used only as a
reference.) If the fluid levelis low, add only enough
of the proper fluidto bring the level upto the HOT
area for a hot check. It doesn’ttake much fluid,
generally less than one pint (0.5 L). Don’t oveflll.

NOT.ICE:
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must bein the COLD area for a We recommend you use only fluid labeled
cold check or in the HOT area or cross-hatched area DEXRON@-111, because fluid with that label
is
for a hot check. made especiallyfor your automatic transmission.
Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON-I11
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in allthe way; thenflip the handle is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
down to lock the dipstick in place.
After adding fluid, recheckthe fluid level as
described under “Howto Check.”
When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; thenflip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
6-18
Manual Transmission Fluid Check the fluid level only when your engine is off, the
vehicle is parked on a level place and the transmissionis
When to Check cool enough for you to rest your fingers on the
transmission case.
A good time to have it checked is when the engine
oil ischanged. However, the fluid inyour manual Then, follow these steps:
transmission doesn't require changing.
How to Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult,you may
choose to have this done at your GM dealership Service
Department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the
instructions here, or you could get a false reading.

NOTICE:
.
Too much or too little fluid can damage your ,'.,',
transmission. Too much can mean that some of
the fluid couldcome out and fall on hot engine 1. Remove the filler plug.
parts or exhaust system parts, startinga fire. Be 2. Check that the lubricant level is up to thebottom of
sure to get an accurate reading if you check your the fillerplug hole.
transmission fluid.
3. If the fluid level is good, install the plug and be sure
it is fully seated. If the fluid level is low, add more
fluid as described in the next steps.
6-19
How to Add Fluid When to Check and What to Use
Here’s howto add fluid. Refer to the Maintenance
Schedule to determine what kindof fluid to use. See
“Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants” in the Index.
1. Remove the filler plug.
2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole. Add only enough
fluid to bring thefluid level up to the bottomof the
filler plug hole.
3. Install the filler plug. Be sure the plug is fully seated.
Hydraulic Clutch
The hydraulic clutch system in your vehicleis
self-adjusting. A slight amountof play (1/4 inch to
1/2 inch or 6 rnm to 12 mm) in the pedal is normal.
Refer to the MaintenanceSchedule, Owner Checks
It isn’t a good idea to “topoff” your clutchfluid. Adding and Services, to determine how often you should check
fluid won’t correct a leak. A fluid loss in this system the fluid level in your clutch master cylinder reservoir
could indicate a problem. Havethe system inspected and for the proper fluid. See “Owner Checks and
and repaired. Services” and “RecommendedFluids and Lubricants”
in the Index.
How to Check
The proper fluid should be added if the level does not
reach the bottom of the diaphragm when it’s in place in
the reservoir.See the instructions on the reservoir cap.

6-20
Rear Axle How to Check Lubricant
When to Check and Change Lubricant
Refer to theMaintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See
“Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.

If the level is belowthe bottom of the filler plug hole,


you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.

6-21
Four-wheel Drive How to Check Lubricant
Most lubricant checks in this section also apply to
four-wheel-drive vehicles. However, they have two
additional systems that needlubrication.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to theMaintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections” in the Index.

If the levelis below the bottom of thefiller plug hole,


you’ll need to add somelubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom
of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricantto use. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.

6-22
Front Axle When the differentialis cold, add enoughlubricant to
raise the level to 1/2 inch (12 mm) below the filler
When to Check and Change Lubricant plug hole.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how When the differentialis at operating temperature
often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See (warm), add enoughlubricant to raise the level to the
“Scheduled Maintenance Services” in theIndex. bottom of the filler plug hole.
How to Check Lubricant What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.
Engine Coolant
The cooling s stem in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL B engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehiclefor 5 years or 150,000miles
(240 000 km) whichever occurs first, ifyou add only
DEX-COOL’ extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how
If you have a problem
to add coolant when it is low.
with engine overheating,see “Engine Overheating” in
the Index.
If the level is below the bottom of thefiller plug hole,
you may needto add some lubricant.

6-23
A 50/50 mixture of water and DEX-COOL@ coolant will: What to Use
Give freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C). Use a mixture of one-half clean water (preferably
Give boiling protection upto 265 “F ( 129°C). distilled) and one-half DEX-COOL@ coolant which
won’t damage aluminum parts.If you use this mixture,
Protect against rust and corrosion. you don’t need to add anythingelse.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
0 Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
A CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to yourcooling system
NOTICE: can be dangerous. Plain water,or some other
liquid likealcohol, can boil before the proper
When addingcoolant, it is important thatyou use coolant mixturewill. Your vehicle’s coolant
only DEX-COOL@(silicate-free) coolant. warning system is set for the proper coolant
If coolant other thanDEX-COOL is added to the mixture. With plain wateror thewrong mixture,
system, premature engine, heater core or your engine couldget too hot butyou wouldn’t
radiator corrosionmay result. In addition, the get the overheatwarning. Your engine could
engine coolantwill require change sooner at -- catch fire andyou or otherscould be burned.
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months, Use a 50/50 mixture of clean water and
whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the DEX-COOL@coolant.
use of coolant other than DEX-COOL@ is not
covered by your new vehicle warranty.

6-24
Checking Coolant
NOTICE:
If you use an improper coolant mixture, your
engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repaircost wouldn’t be coveredby your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can
freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core
and other parts.

If you haveto add coolant more than four times a year,


have your dealer check your cooling system.

I NOTICE: When your engine is cold, the coolant level should be at


If you use the proper coolant,you don’t have to ADD, or a little higher. When your engine is warm, the
add extra inhibitors or additiveswhich claim to level should be up to FULL HOT, or a littlehigher.
improve thesystem. These canbe harmful.
Adding Coolant
If you need morecoolant, add the proper DEX-COOL@
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.

6-25
1 Radiator Pressure Cap

lhrning the radiator pressure cap when the


engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and
scalding liquidsto blow out and burnyou badly.
With the coolantrecovery tank, you will almost
never have to add coolant at the radiator.
--
Never turn the radiator pressure cap even a
--
little when the engine and radiator arehot.

Add coolant mixture atthe recovery tank, but be careful


not to spill it.

v:
-

You can be burnedif you spill coolanton hot


I NOTICE:
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol, Your radiator capis a 15 psi (105 kPa)
and itwill burn if the engine parts are hot pressure-type cap and must be tightly installed to
enough. Don’t spill coolant ona hot engine. prevent coolantloss and possible enginedamage
from overheating.Be sure the arrowson the cap
line upwith the overflow tube on the radiator
filler neck.

6-26
Thermostat When to Check Power Steering Fluid
Engine coolant temperature is controlled by a thermostat It isnot necessary to regularly check power steering
in theengine coolant system. The thermostat stops the fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
flow of coolant through the radiator until the coolant you hear an unusualnoise. A fluid loss in this system
reaches a preset temperature. could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
Power Steering Fluid
How To Check Power Steering Fluid
When the engine compartment is cool, wipe the cap and
the top of the reservoir clean, then unscrew the capand
wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. Replace the cap and
completely tighten it. Then remove the cap again and
look at the fluid level on the dipstick.
The level should be betweenthe ADD and FULL marks.
If necessary, add only enoughfluid to bring the level up
1 to the proper range.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses andseals.

6-27
Windshield Washer Fluid Open the cap labeled WASHER FLUID ONLY with
the washer symbol on it. Add washer fluid until the
What toUse tank is full.
When you need windshield washerfluid, be sureto read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use.If you will be NOTICE:
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use afluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
0 When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
Adding Washer Fluid adding water.
0 Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze
and damageyour washer fluid tank and
other partsof the washer system.Also,
water doesn’t cleanas well as washer fluid.
0 Fill your washer fluidtank only
three-quarters full when it’s very cold. This
allows for expansionif freezing occurs,
which could damage the tank if it is
completely full.
0 Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
your windshield washer. It can damage
your washer system and paint.

6-28
Brakes leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should
have your brake systemfixed, since a leak means that
Brake .Fluid sooner or later your brakes won’t work well, or won’t
work at all.
So, it isn’t a good ideato “top off’ your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much
fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add
(or remove) brakefluid, as necessary, only when work
~ is doneonthebrakehydraulicsystem.

If you havetoo much brake fluid,it can spill


if the engine
on the engine. The fluid will burn
is hot enough. You or others could be burned,
Your brake master cylinder reservoir is here. isItfilled and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
with DOT-3 brake fluid. fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
There are only two reasons why the brakefluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptablelevel during normal Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to
brake lining wear. When newlinings are put in, the fluid check your brakefluid. See “Periodic Maintenance
level goes back up.The other reason is thatfluid is Inspections” in the Index.

6-29
Checking Brake Fluid What to Add
You can check the brake When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3
fluid without taking off brake fluid -- such as Delco Supreme 1l @(GM Part
the cap. No. 12377967). Use new brakefluid from a sealed
container only.
Always clean the brakefluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.

A CAUTION:
With the wrong kindof fluid in your brake
Just look at the brakefluid reservoir. The fluid level system, your brakes may not work well, or they
should be above MIN. If it isn’t, have your brake system may not even work at all. This could cause a
checked to see if there is a leak. crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure thelevel is above theMIN but not over
the MAX mark or the top of the window on the side
of the reservoir.

6-30
Brake Wear
NOTICE: Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Using the wrong fluid can badly damage Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that
brake system parts. Forexample, just afew make a high-pitched warning sound whenthe brake
pads are worn and new pads are needed.The sound
drops of mineral-based oil, such asengine
may come andgo or be heard all the time your vehicle
oil, in your brake system can damage brake is moving (except when youare pushing on the brake
system parts so badly thatthey’ll have to be pedal firmly).
replaced. Don’t let someone put in the
wrong kindof fluid.
If you spill brake fluid on yourvehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not tospill brake fluid The brake wear warning sound means that soon
on yourvehicle. If you do, wash it off your brakeswon’t work well. That could lead to
immediately. See “Appearance Care” in an accident. Whenyou hear the brake wear
the Index. warning sound, have yourvehicle serviced.

I NOTICE:
Continuing to drivewith worn-out brake pads
could result incostly brake repair.

6-31
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake Replacing Brake System Parts
squeal when the brakes are firstapplied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with The braking system on a modem vehicle is complex.
your brakes. Its many parts haveto be of top quality and work well
together if the vehicle is to have really good braking.
Properly torqued wheel nutsare necessary to help Your vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality
prevent brake pulsation. Whentires are rotated, inspect GM brake parts. When you replace partsof your braking
brake padsfor wear and evenlytorque wheel nuts in the system -- for example, when your brake linings wear
proper sequence to GM specifications. down and you haveto have new ones put in-- be sure
Brake linings shouldalways be replaced as complete you get new approved GM replacement parts.If you
axle sets. don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly. For
example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong
See “Brake System Inspection” in Section
7 of this for your vehicle, the balance between your front and
manual under Part C “Periodic Maintenance Inspections.” rear brakes can change-- for the worse. The braking
performance you’ve cometo expect can change in many
Brake Pedal Travel other ways if someone putsin the wrong replacement
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to brake parts.
normal height,or if there is a rapid increase in pedal
travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble. Battery
Every new vehicle has an ACDelcoFreedom@battery.
Brake Adjustment You never have to add water toone of these. When it’s
Every time you makea brake stop, yourdisc brakes time for a new battery, we recommend an ACDelco
adjust for wear. Freedom battery. Get onethat has the replacement
number shownon the original battery’s label.

6-32
Vehicle Storage Bulb Replacement
If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days Before you replace any bulbs, besure that all the lamps
or more, remove the black, negative (-) cable from are off and theengine isn’t running. See “Replacement
the battery. This will help keep your batteryfrom Bulbs” in the Index.
running down.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your GM dealer’s service department.
CAUTION: Halogen Bulbs
Battel s have acid that can burn you 2 B gas
that canexplode. You can be badly hurt if you
aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” in the Index
1 A CAUTIOI.:
I
for tips on working around a battery without Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
hu rt. can burstif you drop or scratch thebulb. You or
others could beinjured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructionson the bulbpackage.
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle
for longer storage periods.
HISO,for your audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent
Feature” in the Index.

6-33
One-Piece Composite HeadlampSystem
1. Open the hood.

5. Turn the bulb assembly to the left to remove it.


6. Put the new bulb assembly into the headlamp
assembly and turn it to the right until itis tight.
2. Remove the black retainer clips by lifting up. 7 . Plug in the electrical connector.
3. Pull the headlamp assembly out. 8. Put the headlamp lens assembly back into the
4. Unplug the electrical connector. vehicle. Install the two retaining clips.

6-34
Two-Piece Composite Headlamp System
1. Open the hood.

5 . Turn the bulb assembly to the left to remove it.


6. Put the new bulb assembly into the headlamp
assembly and turn it to the right until it is tight.
2. Remove the black retainer clips by lifting up. 7. Plug in the electrical connector.
3 . Pull the headlamp lens assembly out. 8. Put the headlamp lens assembly back into the
4. Unplug the electrical connector. vehicle. Install the tworetaining clips,

6-35
One-Piece FrontWrn Signal Lamp Assembly 3. Pull the bulb straight out to removeit from
the socket.
1. Remove the headlamp assembly as shown under
“One-Piece Composite Headlamp System” earlier in 4. Push the new bulb into the socket until it snaps
this section. into place.
5. Put the bulb socket into thelamp assembly and twist
2. Twist the bulb it tothe right until it is tight.
socket to remove
it from the 6. Put the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle.
headlamp Install the two retaining clips.
assembly.

6-36
Ttvo-Piece Front Tbrn Signal Lamp Assembly
1. Remove the headlamp assembly as shown under
“Two-Piece Composite Headlamp System” earlier in
this section.

2. Locate the locking


tabs on the
assembly. Squeeze
the tabs together
and push that end
of the assembly out
while holding the
tabs. The assembly
will swing out.
4. Turn the harness bulb socket to the left to removeit.
5 . Push the new bulb into the socket until it snaps
into place.
3. Unplug the electrical connector. 6. Put the new bulbinto the headlamp lens assembly
and turn itto the right until it is tight.
7. To replace the assembly, snap the outboard end of
the lamp assembly backinto the vehicle. Thenswing
the assembly in and snap it into place.

6-37
Taillamps 7. Put the socket into the lamp assembly and turn the
socket tothe right until it locks into place.
I . Open the endgate.
8. Install the lamp assembly and screws.
2. Remove the two screws
from the lamp assembly. 9. Close the endgate.
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
See “Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts” in the
Index for the proper typeof replacement blade.

r;;OTICE: I
Use care when removingor installing a blade
assembly. Accidental bumping can cause the arm
to fall back and strike the windshield.
3. Pull the assembly away from the vehicle.
4. Turn the socket to the left to remove it. Push the tab 1. To remove the old wiperblades, lift the wiper arm
in while you turn the socketto the left. until it locks into a vertical position.
5. Holding the base of the bulb, pull the bulb straight
out of the socket.
6. Push the new bulb straight into the socket until
it clicks.

6-38
3. Remove the insert from the blade assembly.The
insert has two notches at one end that are locked by
the bottom claws of the blade assembly. At the
notched end, pull theinsert from the blade assembly.

A. Blade Assembly D. Blade Pivot


0
B. Arm Assembly E. Hook Slot I
C. Locking Tab E ArmHook 4. To install the new wiper insert, slide the insert (D),
2. Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking tab. notched end last, into the end with two blade claws
Pull down on the blade assemblyto release it from (A). Slide the insert all the way throughthe blade
the wiper arm hook. claws at the opposite end(B). The plastic caps (C)
will be forced off as the insertis fully inserted.

6-39
5. Be sure that the notches are locked by the bottom 6. Put the blade assembly pivot inthe wiper arm
claws. Make sure thatall other claws are properly hook. Pullup until the pivot lockingtab locks in
locked on both sides of the insert slots. the hook slot.
7. Carefully lower the wiperarm and blade assembly
onto the windshield.
Backglass Wiper Blade Replacement
See “Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement” in this
section for instructions on how to change the backglass
wiper blade. The backglass wiperblade will not lock
in a vertical position like the windshield wiper blade,
so care shouldbe used when pullingit away from
the vehicle.

B w C
lour new vehicle comes with high-quality tires madeby
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about yourtire warranty and whereto obtain service,see
your GM Warranty bookletfor details.

A. Claw in Notch
B. Correct Installation
C. Incorrect Installation

6-40
Inflation -- Tire Pressure
The CertificatiodTirelabel, which is on the driver’s
I door edge, above the doorlatch, shows the correct
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires inflation pressures for your tires when they’re cold.
are dangerous. “Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at least
three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
0 Overloading your tires can cause overheating
as a result of too much friction. You could
have an airout anda serious accident. See NOTICE:
“Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index.
0 Underinflated tires pose the same danger as Don’t let anyonetell you that underinflation or
overloaded tires. The resulting accident not. If your tires
overinflation is all right. It’s
could cause serious injury.Check all tires don’t have enoughair (underinflation), you can
frequently to maintain the recommended get the following:
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked 0 Too much flexing
when your tires arecold. 0 Too much heat
0 Overinflated tires are morelikely to be
Tireoverloading
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden Bad wear
--
impact such as when you hit a pothole. Bad handling
Keep tires at the recommended pressure. Bad fuel economy.
0 Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your
NOTICE: (Continued)
tread is badly worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replacethem.

6-41
Tire Inspection and Rotation
I NOTICE: (Continued) I Tires should be rotated every 6,000 to 8,000 miles
If your tires have too much air (overinflation), (10 000 to 13 000 km). Any time you notice
you can get the following: unusual wear, rotate your tires as soon as possible
and check wheel alignment. Also check for damaged
Unusualwear tires or wheels. See “When It’s Time for New Tires”
Badhandling and “Wheel Replacement” later in this section for
Roughride more information.
Needless damage from road hazards.
The purposeof regular rotation isto achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle.
The first
When to Check rotation is the most important.See “Scheduled
Maintenance Services’’in the Index for scheduled
Check yourtires once a month or more. Also, check rotation intervals.
the tire pressure of the spare tire.
If you have a compact spare tire, itshould be at
60 psi (420 Wa).
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gageto check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Be sure to put the valve caps back the on valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.

6-42
A C. UTION:
1Q Rust or dirt on wheel,
a or on the parts to which
it is fastened, can makewheel nuts become loose
after atime. The wheel could comeoff and cause
an accident. Whenyou change a wheel, remove
any rust or dirt from places where the wheel
attaches to thevehicle. In anemergency, you can
i use a cloth or a papertowel to do this; but be
sure touse a scraper or wire brush later,if you
or dirt off. (See
need to, to get all the rust
“Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index.)
When rotating yourtires, always use one of the correct
rotation patterns shown here.
If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, don’t include it
in your tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and rear
inflation pressures as shown on theCertificatiomire
label. Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” in the Index.

6-43
When It’s Timefor New Tires The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
One way to tell when it’s The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
time for new tires is to can’t be repaired well becauseof the size or location
check the treadwear of the damage.
indicators, which will
appear when yourtires have
Buying New Tires
only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at
less of tread remaining. the Certificatioflire label.
The tires installed on your vehicle when itwas new had
a Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way
your vehicle will continueto have tires that are designed
to give properendurance, handling, speed rating,
You need a new tire if any of the following statements traction, ride and other things during normalservice on
are true: your vehicle. If your tires havean all-season tread
You can see the indicators at three or more places design, the TPC number willbe followed by an “MS”
around the tire. (for mud and snow).
0 You can see cord or fabric showing through the If you ever replace yourtires with those not havinga
tire’s rubber. TPC Spec number, makesure they are the samesize,
load range, speed rating and construction type(bias,
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep
bias-belted or radial) as youroriginal tires.
enough to show cord or fabric.

6-44
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
The following information relatesto the system
developed by the UnitedStates National Highway
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while Traffic Safety Administration, which gradestires by
driving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types treadwear, traction and temperature performance.
(radial and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not (This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
handle properly, and you could have a crash.
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Using tires of different sizes may also cause system does not applyto deep tread, winter-type snow
damage to your vehicle. Be sure touse the same tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with
size and type tires on all wheels. nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
It’s all right to drive
with your compact spare or to some limited-production tires.
(if you have one). It was developed for use on While the tires available on General Motors passenger
your vehicle. cars and light trucks may vary with respect
to these
grades, they mustalso conform to Federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
A CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on yourvehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/orwheel could
fail suddenly, causinga crash. Use only radial-ply
tires with the wheels on your vehicle.

6-45
Treadwear Temperature -- A, B, C
The treadwear grade isa comparative rating basedon The temperature grades are A (the highest),B, and C,
the wear rate of thetire when tested under controlled representing the tire’s resistance to the generationof
conditions on a specified governmenttest course. heat and its abilityto dissipate heat when tested under
For example, a tire graded150 would wear one and a controlled conditions on specified
a indoor laboratory
half (1 1/2) times as wellon the government course test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
as a tire graded100. The relative performance of tires material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life,
depends upon the actual conditions of their use, and excessive temperature can leadto sudden tire
however, and may depart significantly from the norm failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
due to variations in driving habits,service practices performance which all passengercar tires must meet
and differences in road characteristics and climate. under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levelsof
Traction -- A, B, C performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
The traction grades, from highestto lowest, are A, B, minimum requiredby law.
and C , and they represent the tire’s ability stop
to on Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is
wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions established for a tire thatis properly inflated and not
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation,or
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
performance. can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Warning: The traction grade assignedto this tire is based
on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and does not
include cornering (turning) traction.

6-46
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced same way as the one it replaces.
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance. If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only with newGM
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are original equipment parts. This way, you willbe sure to
not needed. However,if you notice unusual tire wear have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nutsfor
or your vehicle pullingone way or the other, the your GM model.
alignment may needto be reset. If you notice your
vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road,
your wheels may needto be rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose,the wheel, bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
wheel bolts and wheel nuts shouldbe replaced. If the dangerous. It could affect the braking and
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
wheels, which can sometimesbe repaired). See your air and make you lose control. You could havea
dealer if any of these conditionsexist. collision in which you or others could be injured
of wheel you need.
Your dealer will know the kind Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts and
wheel nuts for replacement.

6-47
Tire Chains
NOTICE:
The wrongwheel can also cause problems with NOTICE:
bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper If your vehicle has P235/75R15, P235/70R15 or
height, vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire 31xlOSOR15LT/C size tires, don’t use tire chains.
chain clearance to the body and chassis. They can damage your vehicle because there’s
not enough clearance.
Use another typeof traction device only if its
See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index for
manufacturer recommendsit for use on your
more information.
vehicle and tiresize combination and road
sed Replacement Wheels conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust orremove the
device if it’s contacting yourvehicle, and don’t
spin yourwheels.
Putting aused wheel on your vehicle is NOTICE: (Continued)
dangerous. You can’t knowhow it’s been usedor
how far it’s been driven.It could fail suddenly
and cause anaccident. If you have to replace a
wheel, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.

6-48
NOTICE: (Continued)
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous.Some
If you do find tractiondevices that will fit, install are toxic. Others can burst intoflame if you strike a
them on the rear tires. match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space.
If you have other size tires, use tire chainsonly When you use anything from a container to clean your
where legal and only when you must. Use only vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings
SAE Class“S” type chains that are the proper and instructions. Andalways open your doors or
size for your tires. Install them on the drive axle windows when you’re cleaningthe inside.
tires (four-wheel-drive vehicles can use chains on
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
both axles) and tighten them as tightly possible
as
with the ends securely fastened. Drive slowly and Gasoline
follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions. If Benzene
you can hear the chains contacting your vehicle,
Naphtha
stop and retightenthem. If the contact continues,
slow down until itstops. Driving too fastor Carbon Tetrachloride
spinning thewheels with chains onwill damage Acetone
your vehicle.
Paint Thinner
0 Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
NailPolishRemover
They can all be hazardous -- some more than
others -- and they can alldamage your vehicle, too.

6-49
Don’t use anyof these unless this manual says you can. 0 Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
In many uses, these will damage your vehicle: 0 Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean area
0 Alcohol often. A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn.
Laundry Soap If a ring forms after spotcleaning, clean the entire
Bleach area immediately orit will set.

0 ReducingAgents Using Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner


on Fabric
Cleaning the Insideof Your Vehicle
1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt.
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather,plastic and painted surfaces 2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask
with a clean, damp cloth. surrounding trim along stitchor welt lines.
Your dealer has two cleaners, Multi-Purpose Interior 3. Mix powdered cleaner following the directions on
Cleaner and Capture Non-SolventDry Spot and Soil the container label to form thicksuds.
Remover for cleaning fabric and carpet. They will clean 4. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge. Don’t
normal spots and stains very well. You can get saturate the material and don’t rubit roughly.
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer. (See
“Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.) 5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a sponge
to remove thesuds.
Here are some cleaningtips:
6. Wipe cleaned areawith a clean, damp towel or cloth.
0 Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.
Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set.

6-50
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems 1 - i c Protection
Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black), Your vehicle has upholstery and carpet that has been
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine and treated with Scotchgard Fabric Protector, a 3M
TM

blood can be removed asfollows: product. It protects fabrics by repelling oil and water,
1 . Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the which are the carriers of most stains. Even with this
soiled area with cool water. protection, you still need to clean your upholstery and
carpet often to keep it looking new.
2. If a stain remains, follow the multi-purpose interior
cleaner instructions described earlier. Further information on cleaningis available by calling
1-800-433-3296 (in Minnesota, 1-800-642-6167).
3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine,
treat the area with a waterhakingsoda solution: Cleaning Vinyl
1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml) Use warm water anda clean cloth.
of lukewarm water.
Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You
4. Let dry. may have todo it more than once.
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain
sauce and unknown stains can be removed asfollows: if you don’t get them off quickly. Usea clean cloth
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain. and a vinyvleather cleaner. See your dealer for
this product.
2. First, clean with cool water and allow to
dry completely.
3. If a stain remains, follow instructions for
Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner.

6-51
Cleaning Leather Cleaning Interior Plastic Components
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap Use onlya mild soap and water solutionon a soft
or saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let cloth or sponge, Commercial cleanersmay affect the
the leather dry naturally.Do not use heatto dry. surface finish.
0 For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. See your Care of SafetyBelts
dealer for this product.
Keep belts clean and dry.
Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polishor shoe polish on leather.
Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the
finish, it can harm the leather.
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
If you do, it
Cleaning theTop of the Instrument Panel may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate protection.
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
Clean safety belts only with mild soap
and
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or
waxes may cause annoying reflectionsin the windshield lukewarm water.
and even make it difficult to see through the windshield
under certain conditions.

6-52
Cleaning Glass Surfaces Clean the outside of the windshield with GM
Windshield Cleaner, BonAmi’ Powder (non-scratching
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner (GM glass cleaning powder), GM Part No. 1050011. The
Part No. 1050427) or a liquid household glass cleaner windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse
will remove normal. tobacco smoke and dust films on it with water.
interior glass.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping
cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield
window, since they may have to bescraped off later. washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water.
If abrasive cleaners are used on theinside of the rear
window, an electric defogger element may be damaged. Check the wiper blades and clean them necessary;
as
Any temporary license should not beattached across replace blades that look worn.
the defogger grid.
Weatherstrips
Cleaning the Outside of the Windshield,Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
Backglass and Wiper Blades longer, seal better, and notstick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield six months. During very cold, damp weather
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running, more frequent application may be required. (See
wax, sap or other material may be onthe blade “Recommended Fluids andLubricants” in the Index.)
or windshield.

6-53
Cleaning the Outsideof Your Vehicle Cleaning ExteriorLampsLenses
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth Use lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a liquid
of color, gloss retention and durability. soap to clean
hand, dish or car washing (mild detergent)
exterior lamps and lenses. Follow instructions under
Washing Your Vehicle “Washing Your Vehicle.”
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finishis to Finish Care
keep it clean by washingit often with lukewarmor
Occasional waxing or mild polishingof your vehicle by
cold water.
hand may be necessaryto remove residue from the paint
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun. finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
Don’t use strong soaps or chemical detergents. Use from your dealer. (See “AppearanceCare and Materials”
liquid hand, dishor car washing (mild detergent)soaps. in the Index.)
You can get GM-approved cleaning products from your
dealer. (See “AppearanceCare and Materials” in the Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paintfinish. The
Index.) Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat
based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning Always use waxes and polishes that are non-abrasive and
agents should be flushed promptly and not allowedto made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish
with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towelto
avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
NOTICE:
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter Machine compoundingor aggressive polishing on
your vehicle. a basecoatklearcoat paint finish may dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.

6-54
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other Don’t take your vehicle throughan automatic car wash
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on
painted surfaces. Wash the vehicleas soon as possible. Cleaning Tires
If necessary, usenon-abrasive cleaners that are marked To clean your tires, use a stiff brush witha tire cleaner.
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period NOTICE:
of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking
new by keeping your vehiclegaraged or covered When applying a tire dressing always take care
whenever possible. to wipeoff any oversprayor splash from all
painted surfaceson the body or wheelsof the
Cleaning Aluminum Wheels vehicle. Petroleum-based products may damage
(If Equipped) the paint finish.
Keep your wheelsclean using a soft cleancloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After Sheet Metal Damage
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A
wax may then be applied. If your vehicleis damaged andrequires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
applies anti-corrosion material to the parts repaired or
surface of your vehicle.Don’t use strong soaps,
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners or
abrasive cleaning brushes on thembecause you could
damage the surface.

6-55
Finish Damage Chemical Paint Spotting
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish Some weather and atmospheric conditions cancreate
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon
quickly and may developinto a major repair expense. and attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This
damage can taketwo forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched
materials available from your dealer or other service
into the paint surface.
outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
in your dealer’s body and paint shop. Although no defect inthe paint job causes this,GM
will repair, atno charge to the owner, the surfaces of
Underbody Maintenance new vehicles damaged bythis fallout condition within
Chemicals usedfor ice and snow removal and dust 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
control can collect on the underbody. If theseare not whichever occurs first.
removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on
the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor
pan and exhaust system even though they have
corrosion protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials
from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and other debris can collect.Dirt packed in closed areas
of the frame should be loosened before beingflushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system cando
this for you.

6-56
Appearance Care Materials Chart
PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION USAGE
Polishing Cloth- Wax Treated Exterior polishing cloth
Tar and Road Oil Remover Removes tar, road oil and asphalt
Chrome Cleaner and Polish Use on chrome, stainless steel, nickel, copper and brass
White Sidewall Tire Cleaner Removes soil and black marks from whitewalls
Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl tops, upholstery and convertible tops
1050427 I 23 oz. (0.680 L) Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime, smoke and fingerprints
1052870 I 16 oz. (0.473L) Wash Wax Concentrate Cleans and lightly waxes
1052918** I 8 oz. (0.237 L) Armor All Protectant
TM
Protects leather, wood, acrylics, Plexiglas , plastic,
rubber and vinyl
Cleans carpets, seats, interior trim, door panels
1052925 16 oz. (0.473 L) Multi-Purpose Interior Clean-
er and floor mats
1052929 16 oz. (0.473 L) Spray on and rinse with water Wheel Cleane
1052930 8 oz. (0.237 L) Attracts, absorbs and removes soils Capture D
12345002 16 02. (0.473 L) Armor All Cleaner
TM Cleans and shinesa variety of surface types
1 sq. ft. 1234572 Shines vehicle without scratching Synthetic C
12345725 12 oz. (0.354 L) Silicone Tire Shine Spray on tire shine
12377964 16 oz. (0.473 L) Finish Enhancer Removes dust, fingerprints and surface contaminants
12377966 16 oz. (0.473 L) Cleaner Wax Removes light scratches and oxidation and protects fini
12377984 16 oz. (0.473 L) Surface Cleaner Removes contaminants, blemishes and swirl marks
See your General Motors Parts Department for these products. **Not recommended for use on instrument panel vinyl.
See “Fluids and Lubricants’’ in the Index.

6-57
Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) the model designation,
0 paint information and
0 a list of all productlon options and special
equipment.
Be sure thatthis label is not removed from the vehicle.
Electrical System
Add-on Electrical Equipment
This is the legal identifierfor your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in thefront corner of the instrument panel,on the
driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside yourvehicle. The VIN also
I NOTICE:
appears on the VehicleCertification and ServiceParts Don’t add anything electricalto your vehicle
labels and the certificatesof title and registration.
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
Engine Identification electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
The 8th character in your VIN is the enginecode. This
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts. can keep other components from working as
they should.
Service Parts IdentificationLabel
You’ll find this label on theinside of the glove box. It’s Your vehicle has anair bag system. Before attemptingto
very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this add anything electricalto your vehicle, see “Servicing
label is: Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.
0 yourVIN,
Headlamps Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The headlamp wiring is protected by aninternal The wiring circuits in your vehicleare protected from
circuit breaker. An electrical overload will cause the short circuits by a combinationof fuses and circuit
lamps to goon and off, or in some cases to remain off. breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires
If this happens, have your headlamp wiring checked caused by electrical problems.
right away. Look at the silver-colored bandinside the fuse. If the
Windshield Wipers band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identicalsize
The windshield wiper motor is protected bya circuit and rating.
breaker and afuse. If the motor overheats dueto heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor
cools. If If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
the overload is caused by some electrical problem, be a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
sure to get it fixed. amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle that
you can get along without-- like the radioor cigarette
Power Windows and Other Power Options lighter -- and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can.
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other
power accessories. When the current loadis too heavy,
the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the
circuit until the problemis fixed or goes away.

6-59
Instrument Panel Fuse Block

Remove the cover by turning the fastenerto the left.


Extra fuses and the fuse extractorare provided in the
cover. To reinstall the fuse panel cover, push in and turn
the fastenerto the right. Fuse/Circuit
Breaker
Usage
A Not Used
B Not Used
1 Headlamp Switch, Body Control
Module, Headlamp Relay
Fuse/Circuit FuseKircuit
Breaker
Usage Breaker
Usage
2 Cigarette Lighter, Data 13 Auxiliary Power
Link Connector
14 Power Locks Motor
3 Cruise Control Module and Switch,
Body Control Module, Heated Seats 15 4WD Switch, Engine Controls
(VCM, PCM, Transmission)
4 Gages, Body Control Module,
Instrument Panel Cluster 16 Supplemental Inflatable Restraint,
SDM Module
Interior Lights
17 Front Wiper
Not Used
18 Not Used
Power Outside Mirror, Power
Lock Relay 19 Radio Battery

8 Courtesy Lamps, Battery Run-Down 20 Not Used


Protection 21 HVAC (Manual), HVAC I
9 HVAC Control Head (Manual) (Automatic), HVAC Sensors
(Automatic)
10 Turn Signal
22 Anti-Lock Brakes
11 Cluster, Engine Control Module
23 Rear Wiper
12 Parking Lamps, Power Window
Switch, Body Control Module, 24 Radio, Ignition
Ashtray Lamp

6-61
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
J . ,.,:.. I, .

The fuse block is under the hood at thedriver's side of


the engine compartment. Name Usage
Remove the cover by turning the fastener to the left. To TRL TRN Trailer Left Turn
reinstall the fuse panel cover, push in and turn the TRR TRN Trailer RightTurn
fastener to the right. TRL B/U Trailer Back-up Lamps
VEH B/U Vehicle Back-up Lamps
RT TURN Right TurnSignal Front
LT TURN Left Turn Signal Front
LT TRN Left Turn Signal Rear

6-62
Name Usage Name Usage
RT TRN Right Turn SignalRear DRL Daytime Running Lamps
RR PRK Right Rear Parking Lamps FOG LP Fog Lamps
TRL PRK Trailer Parking Lamps IGN A Starting and Charging IGN 1
LT HDLP Left Headlamp STUD #2 Accessory Feeds, Electric Brake
RT HDLP Right Headlamp PARKLP Parking Lamps
FR PRK Front Parking Lamps LR PRK Left Rear Parking Lamps
INT BAT I/P Fuse Block Feed IGN C Starter Solenoid, Fuel Pump,PRNDL
ENG 1 Engine Sensors/Solenoids, MAP, HTDSEAT Heated Seat
CAM, PURGE, VENT ATC Electronic TransferCase
ECM B Engine Control Module,Fuel Pump, RRDFOG Rear Defogger
Module, Oil Pressure
HVAC HVAC System
ABS Anti-Lock Brake System
TRCHMSL Trailer Center High-MountStop
ECM 1 Engine Control ModuleInjectors Lamp
HORN Horn RR WIW Rear Window Wiper
BTSI Brake-Transmission Shift Interlock CRANK Clutch Switch, NSBU Switch
B N LP Back-up Lamps HAZLP Hazard Lamps
NC Air Conditioning VECHMSL Vehicle Center High-Mount Stop Lamp
RAP Retained Accessory Power HTDMIR Heated Mirror
02 Oxygen Sensor STOPLP Stoplamps
IGN B Column Feed, IGN2, 3,4 TBC Truck Body Computer

6-63
Replacement Bulbs
Lamps Quantity Number
Halogen Headlamps,Composite Low Beam 2 9006 HB4
Halogen Headlamps,Composite High Beam 2 9005 HB3
Tail and Stop Lamps 4 3057
Front Sidemarker Lamps 2 194 NA
Front Turn Signal Lamps 2 3157
Turn Signal Lamps 2 3157 NA

Capacities and Specifications Wheels and Tires


Engine Description . . . . . . . . . . . . “VORTEC” 4300 Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . 1001b-ft (140 N-m)
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V6 Tire Pressure . . . . . . See the CertificatiodTirelabel.
VINCode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W See “LoadingYour Vehicle” inthe Index.
Firing Order ...................... 1-6-5-4-3-2
Horsepower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 at 4,400 rpm
Thermostat Specification . . . . . . . . . . . 195OF (9 1 “C)
Spark Plug Gap . . . . . . . . . . 0.045 inches (0.114 cm)

6-64
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Capacities (Approximate)
Replacement part numbers listed in this section are Cooling System*
based on the latest information available at the time of Automatic Trans. . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.7 quarts (11.1 L)
printing, and are subject to change. If a part listed in this Manual Trans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 I .9 quarts ( I 1.3 L)
manual is not the sameas thepart used in your vehicle
when it wasbuilt, or if you have any questions, please Crankcase* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 quarts (4.3 L)
contact your GM truck dealer. Automatic Transmission
(Drain and Refill)" . . . . . . . . . . . 5.0 quarts (4.7 L)
Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12551472 Differential Fluid
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PF52 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 pints (1.9 L)
Air Cleaner Filter ...................... A1163C Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 pints (1.2 L)
PCV Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CV746C Fuel Tank (2-Door Models) . . . . . . . 19 gallons (72 L)
Automatic Transmission Filter Kit . . . . . . 24200796 Fuel Tank (4-DOOr Models) . . . . . . . 18 gallons (68 L)
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4 1-932 A/C Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . 30 oz. or 2 Ibs. (0.9 kg)
Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GF48 1 of R-134a
Front Windshield Wiper
Blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trico (20 inched50.8cm) *After refill, the level must be checked.
Backglass Wiper Blade . . Trico (14 inched35.6 cm) Air Conditioning Refrigerants
Not all air conditioning refrigerants are the same.
If the air conditioning system in your vehicle needs
refrigerant, be sure the proper refrigerant is used. If
you're not sure, ask your dealer.

6-65
Vehicle Dimensions*
Wheelbase Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67.8 inches (1 72.2 cm)
SiT10516 .............. 100.5 inches (255.3 cm) Front Tread
SIT10506 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107.0 inches (271.8 cm) S Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55.0 inches (139.6 cm)
Length T Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57.3 inches (145.4 cm)
S10516 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175.0 inches (444.5 cm) Rear Tread
T10516 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175.4 inches (445.5 cm) S Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54.7 inches (138.8 cm)
SiT10506 .............. 181.5 inches (461.0 cm) T Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55.1 inches (139.9 cm)
Height
S10516 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66.0 inches (167.6 cm) *Figures reflect base equipment only.
T10516 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66.9 inches (170.0cm)
S10506 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65.9 inches (167.4 cm)
T10506 ................ 67.0 inches (170.2 cm)

6-66
Section 7 MaintenanceSchedule

This section covers the maintenance required for your vehicle. Your vehicle needs theseservices to retain its safety,
dependability and emission control performance.

7-2 Introduction 7-7 Short Trip/City MaintenanceSchedule


7-4 Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services 7-27 Long Trip/Highway MaintenanceSchedule
7-5 Short Trip/City Definition 7-39 Part B: Owner Checks and Services
7-5 Short Trip/City Intervals 7-43 Part C : Periodic Maintenance Inspections
7-6 Long Tripmighway Definition 7-45 Part D: Recommended Fluids andLubricants
7-6 Long Tripmighway Intervals 7-48 Part E: Maintenance Record

7-1
Introduction
IMPORTANT: Your Vehicle and the Environment
KEEP ENGINE OIL
AT THE PROPER Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
LEVEL AND CHANGE AS
RECOMMENDED vehicle ingood working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance procedures
are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the qualityof the air we breathe. Improper fluid
- levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level
of emissions from your vehicle.To help protect our
protection
El
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good
condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.
Plan
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet, or your GM
dealer for details.

7-2
How This Section is Organized “Part B: Owner Checks andServices” tells you
what should be checked and when. Italso explains
The remainder of this sectionis divided into five parts: what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in
“Part A: Scheduled MaintenanceServices” shows good condition.
what to have done and how often. Some of these “Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections”
explains
services can be complex, so unless you are technically important inspectionsthat your dealer’s service
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should department or another qualified service center
let your dealer’s service departmentor another qualified should perform.
service centerdo these jobs.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”lists
some recommended productsto help keep your vehicle
properly maintained.These products, or their
equivalents, should be used whether you do the work
yourself or have it done.
Performing maintenance work on vehicle
a can
be dangerous. In trying to dosome jobs, you can “Part E: Maintenance Record”provides a place for
be seriously injured.Do your own maintenance you to record the maintenance performedon your
vehicle. Whenever any maintenanceis performed, be
work only if you have the required know-how
sure to write it down in this part.This will help you
and the propertools and equipment for the job. determine when yournext maintenance should be done.
If you have any doubt,have a qualified In addition, it is a good ideato keep your maintenance
technician do the work. receipts. They maybe needed to aualify your vehicle for
warranty repairs.
If you are skilled enough to dosome work on your
vehicle, you will probably wantto get the service
information. See “Service and Owner Publications” in
the Index.

7-3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance The proper fluids and lubricants touse are listed in
Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses
Services these. All parts should be replaced and all necessary
- lg Your Mi - Itec3nce Schedule repairs done beforeyou or anyone else drives the vehicle.
These schedules are for vehicles that:
we at General Motors wantto help you keep your
vehicle in good workingcondition. But we don’t know e carry passengers and cargo within recommended
exactly how you’ll drive it. You may drive very short limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s
distances only a few times a week. Or you maydrive Certificationire label. See “Loading Your Vehicle”
long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather. in the Index.
You may use your vehicle in makingdeliveries. Or e are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many driving limits.
other ways.
e are driven off-road inthe recommended manner. See
Because of all the different ways people use their “Off-Road Driving WithYour Four-Wheel-Drive
vehicles, maintenance needsvary. You may even need Vehicle” in the Index.
more frequent checks andreplacements than you’ll find
in the schedules in this section. So please read this 0 use the recommended fuel. See “Fuel” inthe Index.
section andnote how you drive. If you have any
questions on howto keep yourvehicle in good Selecting the Right Schedule
condition, see your dealer. First you’ll need to decide which of the two schedulesis
This part tells you the maintenance services you should right for your vehicle. Here’s how to decide which
have done and when you should schedule them. If you schedule to follow:
go to your dealer for your service needs, you’ll know
that GM-trained and supportedservice people will
perform the work using genuine GMparts.

7-4
Maintenance Schedule

i
Short Trip/City Definition Short Trip/City Intervals
Follow the Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule if any Every 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil and
one of these conditions is truefor your vehicle: Filter Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first).
Chassis Lubrication (or 3 months, whichever occurs
0 Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).
first). Drive Axle Service (or 3 months, whichever
This is particularly important when outside
occurs first),
temperatures are below freezing.
Every 6,000 Miles (10 000 km): Tire Rotation.
0 Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic). Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter
Inspection, if driving in dusty conditions. Automatic
0 You operate your vehicle in dusty areas or
Transmission Service (severe conditions only).
off-road frequently.
0 You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter
Replacement. Fuel Filter Replacement.
your vehicle.
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic
0 If the vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi
Transmission Service (normal conditions).
or other commercial application.
One of the reasons you should follow this schedule
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection. Fuel Tank, Cap
if you operate your vehicle under anyof these conditions
and Lines Inspection.
is that these conditions cause engine oil to break
down soonel:

795
Maintenance Schedule
I Short Trip/City Intervals I
Every 100,000 Miles (166000 km): Spark Plug Wire Every 7,500 Miles (12 500 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement. Positive Change (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Inspection. Chassis Lubrication (or every 12 months, whichever
Every 150,000 Miles (240000 km): Cooling System occurs first). Drive Axle Service. Tire Rotation.
Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first). Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Automatic
Transmission Service (severe conditions only).
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Fuel Filter
Be sure to follow the complete maintenance schedule on
Replacement. Air Cleaner Filter Replacement.
the following pages.
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic
Transmission Service (normal conditions).
Every 60,000 Miles (100000 km): Engine
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection. FuelTank,
Follow this maintenance scheduleonly if none of the Cap and Lines Inspection.
conditions from the Short Trip/City Maintenance Every 100,000 Miles (166000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Schedule is true.Do not use this schedule if the vehicle Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement. Positive
is used for trailer towing, driven in a dusty area
or used Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Inspection.
off paved roads. Use the Short Trip/City schedule for Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System
these conditions. Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first).
Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
highway conditions causes engine oil to break Be sure to follow the complete maintenance schedule on
down slowez the following pages.
7-6
I Fzlort TripKity Maintenance Schedule I
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles + A good time to check your brakes is during tire
(166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under “Periodic
(166 000 km) at the same intervals. The services shown Maintenance Inspections’’ in Part C of this schedule.
at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at ** Drive axle service (see “Recommended Fluids and
the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km). Lubricants” in the Index for proper lubricant to use):
See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic 0 Locking Differential -- Drain fluid and refill at first
Maintenance Inspections” following. engine oil change. At subsequent oil changes, check
Footnotes fluid level and add fluid as needed. If driving in
dusty areas or towing a trailer, drain fluid and refill
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the every 15,000 miles (25 000 km).
California Air Resources Board hasdetermined that the 0 Standard Differential -- Check fluid level and add
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify fluid as needed at everyoil change. If driving in
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the dusty areas or towing a trailer, drain fluid and refill
completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however, every 15,000 miles (25 000 km).
urge that all recommended maintenance services be 0 More frequent lubrication may be requiredfor
performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance
heavy-duty or off-road use.
be recorded.
# Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering
linkage, parking brake cable guides, propshaft splines,
universal joints and brake pedalsprings.

7-7
I ShortTkiplCityMaintenanceSchedule 1
3,000 Miles (5 000 km) DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Checkconstant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
6,000 Miles (10 000 km) DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)
9,000 Miles (15000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
7-8
I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule I
0 Check readfront axlefluid level and add fluid as needed. Checkconstant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
12,000 Miles (20 000 km) DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Sewice.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and addfluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
15,000 Miles (25 000 km) DATE I
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace
filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Sewice. (See footnote?.)
(Continued)
7-9
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
15,000 Miles (25 000 km) (Continued)
Cl Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote**.)
0 Change automatic transmission fluid andfilter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one ormore of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid
and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
18,000 Miles (30 000 km)
0 Change engine oil andfilter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components(or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote#.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information, (See footnote +.)
7-10
I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule I
21,000 Miles (35 000 km) DATE I
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. I ACTUAL
MILEAGE I SERVICEDBY: I
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
24,000 Miles (40 000 km) DATE
I
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. I ACTUAL
MILEAGE I SERVICEDBY: I
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote#.)
0 Check readfront axlefluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
27,000 Miles (45 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE

(Continued)

7-11
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
27,000 Miles (45 000 km) (Continued)
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whicheveroccurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Checkconstant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
30,000 Miles (50000 km) DATE 1
Change engine oil and filter (orevery 3 months, whicheveroccurs first).
An Emission Control Service. I ACTUAL
MILEAGE I SERVICEDBX I
Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Checkconstant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
0 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.

7-12
I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule I
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
I f you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change thefluid
and filter every50,000 miles (83 000 km).
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
33,000 Miles (55 000 km) DATE
I
0 Change engine oiland filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. I ACTUAL
MILEAGE I SERVICEDBY: I
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
36,000 Miles (60 000 km) DATE I
0 Change engine oiland filter (orevery 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
(Continued)

7-13
I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule I
36,000 Miles (60 000 km) (Continued)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern andadditional information. (Seefootnote +.)
Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluidas needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (Seefootnote **.)
39,000 Miles (65 000 km) DATE I
0 Change engineoil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle sealsfor leaking. (See footnote **.)
42,000 Miles (70 000 km) I DATE I
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
ACTUAL
MILEAGE I SERVICEDBE
0 Lubricate chassis components(or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axleseals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” inthe Index for proper
rotation pattern andadditional information. (Seefootnote +.)
7-14
I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule I
I I
45,000 Miles (75 000 km) DATE
I
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. I ACTUAL
MILEAGE I SERVICEDBY: I
Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
Check readfront axlefluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of theseconditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.

I f you do not use your vehicle under anyof these conditions,change the fluid
andfilter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
0 Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace
filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)

7-15
I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule I
48,000 Miles (80 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
+
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE SERVICED BY:
I

0 Rotate tires. See “TireInspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
50,000 Miles (83 000 km) DATE I
If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed
previously and, therefore, haven’t changed your automatic transmission MILEAGE
fluid, change boththe fluid and filter. Manual transmission fluiddoesn’t
require change.
51,000 Miles (85 000 km) DATE
I
Change engine oil and filter (or every 5 months, whicheveroccurs first).
An Emission Control Sewice.
Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluidas needed. Checkconstant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
7-16
I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule I
I
54,000 Miles (90 000 km) I DATE 3
I
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. I ACTUAL
MILEAGE I SERVICEDBY: I
Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axlefluid level and add fluid as needed. Checkconstant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Indexfor proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
57,000 Miles (95000 km) I DATE I
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Checkconstant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

7-17
1 Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule I
60,000 Miles (100 000 km) DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whicheveroccurs first).
An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE
Lubricate chassis components (or every3 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluidas needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches90°F
(32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
I f you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid
andfilter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
CI Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
0 Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
0 Replace aircleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.

7-18
I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule I
0 Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket
for any damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation’’ inthe Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
63,000 Miles (105 000 km) DATE 1
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst). ACTUAL
SERVICED BY:
An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axlefluid level and addfluid as needed. Checkconstant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
66,000 Miles (110 000 km) DATE I
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first),
An Emission Control Service. I ACTUAL
MILEAGE I SERVICEDBY: I
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and addfluid as needed. Checkconstant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
(Continued)
7-19
I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule I
66,000 Miles (110 000 km) (Continued)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” inthe Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (Seefootnote +.)
69,000 Miles (115 000 km) DATE
I
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
Check readfront axle fluid level and addfluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
~-
72,000 Miles (120 000 km) DATE I
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Sewice. MILEAGE
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (Seefootnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper
rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)

7-20
I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule I
75,000 Miles (125 000 km) I DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (orevery 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
I7 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
1 ACTUAL
MILEAGE SERVICED BY:

under one or more of these conditions:


- In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32°C) orhigher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid
and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
0 Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter
if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
0 Check readfront axlefluid level and add fluid as needed. Checkconstant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

7-21
I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule I
78,000 Miles (130 000 km) DATE
I
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service. I ACTUAL
MILEAGE I SERVICEDBY I
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper
rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)
81,000 Miles (135 000 km) DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. I ACTUAL
MILEAGE I SERVICED BY:
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every3 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
84,000 Miles (I40 000 km) DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.

7-22
I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule I
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Checkconstant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
87,000 Miles (145 000 km) DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
(Continued)

7-23
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
90,000 Miles (150 000 km) (Continued)
0 Check readfront axlefluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (Seefootnote **.)
0 Change automatic transmissionfluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found intaxi, police or delivery service.
Ifyou do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid
and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
0 Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
0 Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

7-24
I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule I
I 1
93,000 Miles (155 000 km) DATE
I
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). ACTUAL I SERVICEDBY: I
I MILEAGE
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). I 1
(See footnote#.)
0 Check readfront axle fluidlevel and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote**.)
I 1
96,000 Miles (160 000 km) DATE
I
0 Change engine oiland filter (orevery 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Sewice. I ACTUAL
MILEAGE I SERVICEDBY: I
I7 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axlefluid level and add fluid as needed. Checkconstant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote+.)
99,000 Miles (165 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (orevery 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE

(Continued)

7-25
I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule I
99,000 Miles (165 000 km)(Continued)
0 Lubricate chassis co )on ts (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
100,000 Miles (166 000 km) DATE
0 Inspect spark plug wires.
An Emission Control Service, I ACTUAL
MILEAGE I SERVICEDBY: I
0 Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
0 If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed
previously and, therefore, haven’t changed your automatic transmission
fluid, change both thefluid and filter. Manual transmission fluid doesn’t
require change.
0 Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) valve.
An Emission Control Service.
150,000 Miles (240 000 km) DATE I
0 Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every60 months since last service,
whichever occursfirst). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use. MILEAGE
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure
cap and neck.Pressure test
cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
7-26
Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule

The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000miles # Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering
(166 000 km)should be performed after 100,000 miles linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brake
(166 000 km)at the same intervals. The services shown cable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints and
at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at brake pedal springs.
the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km).
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire
See “Owner Checks and Services’’ and“Periodic rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” following. Maintenance Inspections” in Part C of this schedule.
Footnotes ** Drive axle service (see “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Indexfor proper lubricant to use):
-i- The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the 0 Locking Differential -- Drain fluid and refill at first
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify engine oil change. At subsequent oil changes, check
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the fluid level and add fluid as needed.
completion of the vehicle’s usefullife. We, however, Standard Differential -- Check fluid level and add
urge that all recommended maintenance services be fluid as needed at every engine oil change.
performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance
be recorded.

7-27
fLong Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule
7,500 Miles ( I 2 500 km) DATE
I
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whicheveroccurs first).
An Emission Control Service. I ACTUAL
MILEAGE I SERVICEDBY: I
Lubricate chassis components (or every12 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axlefluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” inthe Index for proper
rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)
15,000 Miles (25 000 km) I DATE I
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service. I ACTUAL
MILEAGE I SERVICEDBY: I
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
Change automatic transmissionfluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one ormore of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32 C) or higher.
O

- In hilly or mountainous terrain.

7-28
Long TrlpEIighway Maintenance Schedule

- When doing frequent trailer towing.


- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions,change the fluid
andfilter every 50,000miles (83 000 km).
17 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
22,500 Miles (37 500 km) I DATE I
0 Change engine oil and filter (orevery 12 months, whicheveroccurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whicheveroccurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axlefluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
(Continued) c
7-29
I
Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)(Continued)
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluidas needed. Checkconstant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Change automatic transmissionfluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32 O C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
lfyou do not useyour vehicle under any of these conditions, change thefluid
andfilter every50,000 miles (83 000 km).
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” inthe Index for proper
rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)
0 Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
0 Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.

7-30
Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule I
I 1
37,500 Miles (62 500 km) DATE
I
0 Change engine oiland filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first),
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and addfluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

45,000 Miles (75 000 km) I DATE I


0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axlefluid level and addfluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32O C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
(Continued)
7-31
I Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)(Continued)
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not useyour vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid
and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection andRotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)

50,000 Miles (83 000 km)


0 If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe
conditions listed previously and,
therefore, haven’tchangedyour automatic transmission fluid, changeboththe MILEAGE
fluid and filter. Manual transmissionfluid doesn’t requirechange.

52,500 Miles (87 500 km)


0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Sewice. MILEAGE
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additionalinformation. (See footnote +.)
Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule
60,000 Miles (100 000 km) DATE I
I
>

0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whicheveroccurs first). ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and addfluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
c] Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under oneor more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you donot use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change thefluid
andfilter every50,000 miles (83 000 km).
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)
0 Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
0 Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
(Continued)
7-33
Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule
60,000 Miles (100 000 km) (Continued)
0 Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket
for any damage.Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)

67,500 Miles (112 500 km) DATE


0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
ACTUAL
MILEAGE I SERVICEDBY I
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See "Tire Inspection and Rotation" in the Indexfor proper
rotation pattern and additionalinformation. (See footnote +.)
75,000 Miles (125 000 km) DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)

7-34
Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule

0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one ormore of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32 C) or higher.
O

- In hilly or mountainous terrain.

- When doing frequent trailer towing.


- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do notuse your vehicle under any of these conditions,change the fluid
and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

82,500 Miles (137 500 km) DATE


0 Change engine oil and filter (orevery 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
(Continued)

7-35
I-- I
Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule
82,500 Miles (137 500 km) (Continued)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and addfluid as needed. Check
constant velocityjoints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information.(See footnote +.)

90,000 Miles (150 000 km) DATE


I
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every12 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluidas needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32 C) or higher.
O

- In hilly or mountainous terrain.


- When doing frequent trailer towing.

- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.


I f you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid
andfilter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).

7-36
Long Tripmighway MaintenanceSchedule

0 Replace fuel filter.


An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
0 Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

97,500 Miles (162 500 km) DATE I


0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluidlevel and add fluid as needed. Checkconstant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

7-37
I Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule
100,000 Miles (166 000 km) I DATE I
0 Inspect spark plug wires.
An Emission Control Service. I MILEAGE
ACTUAL
I SERVrCEDBy I
0 Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
0 If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed
previously and, therefore, haven’t changed your automatic transmission
fluid, change boththe fluid and filter. Manual transmission fluid doesn’t
require change.
0 Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) valve.
An Emission Contrul Service.
150,000 Miles (240 000 km) DATE
I
0 Drain, flush and refill cooling system(or every 60 months since last service,
whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Indexfor what to use. I ACTUAL
MILEAGE I SERVICEDBY I
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure
cap and neck. Pressuretest
the cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.

7-38
Part B: Owner Checks and Services Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Listed below are owner checks and services which Check the windshield washer fluid level in the
should be performedat the intervals specified to help windshield washer tank and addthe proper fluid if
ensure the safety, dependability and emission control necessary. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” inthe Index
performance of your vehicle. for further details.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once. At Least Once a Month
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, asshown in Tin - ationCheck
Part D. Make sure tires are inflated to the correa pressures. See
At Each FuelFill “Tires” in the Indexfor further details.

It is important for you or a service station attendant to Cassette Deck Service


perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill. Clean cassette deck. Cleaning should be done every
Engine Oil Level Check 50 hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems” in the
Index for further details.
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil
if necessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Index for
further details.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL@
coolant mixture if necessary. See “Engine Coolant” in
the Index for further details.

7-39
At Least Twicea Year Automatic Transmission Check
Check the transmission fluid level; add
if needed. See
Restraint System Check
“Automatic Transmission” in the Index. A fluid loss
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your may indicate a problem. Check the system and repair
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are if needed.
working properly. Lookfor any other looseor damaged
safety belt system parts.If you see anything that might Hydraulic Clutch System Check
keep a safety belt system from doing job, its have it Check the fluid level in the clutch reservoir.
See
repaired. Have any tornor frayed safety belts replaced. “Hydraulic Clutch Fluid” inthe Index. A fluid loss in
Also lookfor any openedor broken air bag coverings, this system could indicate a problem. Have the system
and have them repairedor replaced. (The air bag system inspected and repaired at once.
does not need regular maintenance.)
At Least Once a Year
Wiper Blade Check
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Inspect wiper blades for wearor cracking. Replace blade
inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak
or Lubricate the keylock cylinders with the lubricant
miss areasof the windshield. Also see “Wiper Blades, specified in PartD.
Cleaning” in the Index. Body Lubrication Service
Manual Transmission Check Lubricate all body door and fuel door hinges, rear
Check the transmission fluid level; add
if needed. See compartment hinges, latches and locks including the
“Manual Transmission’’ in the Index. Checkfor leaks. glove box, console doors and the body hood and any
A fluid lossmay indicate a problem. Have the system moving seat hardware. Lubricate the hood safety lever
inspected and repairedif needed. pivot and prop rod pivot.Part D tells you what to use.
More frequent lubrication may be required when
exposed to a corrosive environment.

7-40
Starter Switch Check Brake-Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) Check
(Automatic Transmission)

A CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly.If it does, you or others could
be When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
injured. Follow the steps below. move suddenly.If it does, you or others could
be
injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. 1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake (see “Parking around the vehicle.It should be parked ona
Brake’, in the Index if necessary) and the regular brake. level surface.
NOTE: Do not use theaccelerator pedal, and be 2. Firmly apply the parking brake (see “Parking Brake”
ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts. in the Index if necessary).
3. On automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the NOTE: Be ready to applythe regular brake
engine in each gear. The starter should work only in immediately if the vehicle beginsto move.
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).If the starter works in 3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN
any other position, your vehicleneeds service. position, but don’t start the engine. Without applying
On manual transmission vehicles, put the shift lever the regular brake, try to move the shift lever outof
in NEUTRAL (N), push the clutch down halfway PARK (P) with normal effort.If the shift lever
and try to start the engine. The starter should work moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle’s BTSI
only when the clutch is pushed down all the way to needs service.
the floor.If the starter works whenthe clutch isn’t
pushed all theway down, yourvehicle needs service.
7-41
Ignition Transmission Lock Check Park on a fairlysteep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping yourfoot on the regular brake, set the
While parked, and with the parking brakeset, try to turn
the ignition keyto LOCK in each shiftlever position. parking brake.
0 To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
0 With an automatic transmission, the key should turn
With the engine running and transmission in
to LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK (P).
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
0 With a manual transmission,the key should turn to the regular brake pedal.Do this until the vehicleis
LOCK only when the shift leveris in REVERSE (R). held by the parking brake only.
On vehicles with a keyrelease button, try to turn the key 0 To check thePARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
to LOCK without pressing thebutton. The key should With the engine running, shiftto PARK (P). Then
turn to LOCK only whenyou press the key button. release all brakes.
On all vehicles,the key should come out only in LOCK. Underbody FlushingService
Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission At least every spring, use plain water
to flush any
PARK (P) Mechanism Check corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud anddebris
can collect.

When you are doing this check, yourvehicle


could beginto move. You or otherscould be
injured and propertycould be damaged.Make
sure thereis room in frontof your vehicle in case
it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake atonce should thevehicle begin to move.

7-42
Part C: Periodic Maintenance Exhaust System Inspection
Inspections Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body
near the exhaust system. Lookfor broken, damaged,
Listed below are inspections and services which should
missing or out-of-position partsas well as open seams,
be performed at least twice a year(for instance, each
holes, loose connections or other conditions which could
spring and fall). You should let your dealer’s service
cause a heat build-up inthe floor pan or could let
department or other qualified service center do these
exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See “Engine Exhaust” in
jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are completed
the Index.
at once.
Proper procedures to perform these services may be Engine Cooling System Inspection
found in a service manual. See “Service and Owner Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they are
Publications” in the Index. cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes, fittings
and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the outside of the
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle To help ensure
radiator and air conditioning condenser.
Boot and Seal Inspection proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling system a
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering pressure cap is recommended at least once a year.
system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of
wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the powersteering Throttle System Inspection
lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding,leaks, Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding,
cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect the drive and for damaged or missing parts. Replace partsas
axle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage. Replace needed. Replace any componentsthat have high effort
seals if necessary. or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator and
cruise control cables.

7-43
Drive Axle Service Brake System Inspection
Check readfront axlefluid level and add as needed. Inspect the complete system.Inspect brake lines and
Check constant velocityjoints and axle seals for leaking. hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,cracks,
chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors
Transfer Case (Four-wheel Drive) for surface condition. Inspect other brake parts,
Inspection including calipers, parking brake, etc. Check parking
Every 12 months or at oil change intervals, check front brake adjustment.You may need to have your brakes
axle and transfercase and add lubricant when necessary. inspected more oftenif your driving habits or conditions
Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and proper result in frequent braking.
installation. More frequent lubrication may be required
on off-road use.

7-44
Part D: Recommended Fluids USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT
and Lubricants Hydraulic Clutch Hydraulic ClutchFluid (GM Part
NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, System No. 12345347 or equivalent
part number or specification may be obtained from DOT-3 Brake Fluid).
your dealer.
Parking Brake Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
USAGE FLUIDLUBRICANT Cable Guides No. 12377985 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirementsof
Engine Oil Engine Oil with the American NLGI # 2, Category LBor
Petroleum Institute Certified For GC-LB.
Gasoline Engines “Starburst”
symbol of the proper viscosity.To Power Steering GM Power Steering Fluid (GM
determine the preferred viscosity System Part No. 1052884 - 1 pint,
for your vehicle’sengine, see 1050017 - 1 quart, or equivalent).
“Engine Oil” in the Index. Synchromesh Transmission Fluid
Manual
Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean water Transmission (GM Part No. 12345349 or
(preferably distilled) and use only equivalent).
GM Goodwrench@DEX-COOL’ Automatic DEXRON@-I11 Automatic
or Havoline@DEX-COOL@ Transmission Transmission Fluid.
Coolant. See “Engine Coolant” in
the Index. Key Lock Multi-Pu ose Lubricant,
Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid
Cylinders % (GM Part
Superlube
Hydraulic Brake @
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
System (GM Part No. 12377967 or
equivalent DOT-3 Brake Fluid).

7-45
~~ ~

USAGE FLUIDLUBRICANT USAGE FLUIDLUBRICANT


Chassis Chassis Lubricant (GM Part Constant Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
Lubrication No. 12377985 or equivalent) or Velocity No. 12377985 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirements of Universal Joint lubricant meeting requirementsof
NLGI # 2, Category LBor NLGI # 2, Category LB or
GC-LB. GC-LB.
Differential, Axle Lubricant (GM Part Clutch Pushrod Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
Front and Rear No. 1052271) or S A E 80W-90 to Clutch Fork No. 12377985 or equivalent) or
Axle GL-5 Gear Lubricant. Joint lubricant meeting requirements of
NLGI # 2, Category LB or
Transfer Case DEXRON@-I11 Automatic GC-LB.
Transmission Fluid.
Hood Latch Lubriplate@Lubricant Aerosol
Windshield GM Optikleen@Washer Solvent Assembly, (GM Part No. 12346293 or
Washer Solvent (GM Part No. 1051515) or Secondary Latch, equivalent) or lubricant meeting
equivalent. Pivots, Spring requirements of NLGI # 2,
Rear Driveline Chassis Lubricant (GM Part Anchor and Category LBor GC-LB.
Center Spline No. 12377985 or equivalent) or Release Pawl
and Universal lubricant meeting requirements of Hood and Door Multi-Pu ose Lubricant,
Joints NLGI # 2, Category LB or Hinges % (GM Part
Superlube
GC-LB. No. 12346241 or equivalent).

7-46
USAGE ~ FLUIDLUBRICANT USAGE FLUIDLUBRICANT
Fuel Filler Door Multi-Pu ose Lubricant, Weatherstrip Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM
and Endgate Superlube% (GM Part Conditioning Part No. 12345579 or equivalent).
Hinges, andRear No. 12346241 or equivalent).
Folding Seat Weatherstrip Multi-Pu ose Lubricant,
Squeaks % (GM Part
Superlube
Tailgate Multi-Pu ose Lubricant,
~ No. 12346241 or equivalent).
Mounted Spare % (GM Part
Superlube
Tire Carrier (if No. 12346241 or equivalent).
equipped), Outer
Tailgate Handle
Pivot Points and
Hinges

7-47
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” can be added on
date, odometer reading and who performed the service the following record pages. Also, you should retain all
in theboxesprovided after the maintenance interval. maintenancereceipts. Your ownerinformation portfolio
Any additional information from “Owner Checks and is a convenientplacetostorethem.
I
Maintenance Record

7-48
Maintenance Record
ODOMETER
DATE SERVICED
READING BY MAINTENANCE
PERFORMED

7-49
Maintenance Record

7-50
Section 8 CustomerAssistanceInformation

Here you will find out how to contact Chevrolet if you need assistance. This section also tells you how to obtain
service publications and how to report any safety defects.

8-2 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 8- 10 Warranty Information


8-4 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone 8-10 Reporting Safety Defects to the United
(TTY) Users States Government
8-5 Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Program 8-1 1 Reporting Safety Defects to the
8-7 Canadian Roadside Assistance Canadian Government
8-8 Courtesy Transportation 8-1 1 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors
8-9 GM Participation in an Alternative Dispute 8-1 1 Ordering Service and Owner Publications
Resolution Program in Canada
Customer Satisfaction Procedure Chevrolet dealers have thefacilities, trained technicians
and up-to-date informationto promptly address any
m concerns you may have. However, if a concern has not
been resolvedto your complete satisfaction, take the
following steps:
STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with a member
of dealership management. Normally, concerns can
If the matter has
be quickly resolved at that level.
already been reviewed with thesales, service or parts
manager, contact the ownerof the dealership or the
general manager.

8-2
STEP TWO -- If after contacting a member of 0 In the U.S. Virgin Islands: 1-800-496-9994
dealership management, it appearsyour concern 0 In the Dominican Republic: 1-800-751-4135
cannot be resolved by the dealership without further (English) or 1-800-75 1-41 36 (Spanish)
help, contact the Chevrolet CustomerAssistance
Center by calling 1-800-222- 1020.In Canada, 0 In the Bahamas: 1-800-389-0009
contact GM of Canada Customer Communication 0 In Bermuda, Barbados, Antigua and the British
Centre in Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777 Virgin Islands: 1-800-534-01 22
(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
0 In all other Caribbean countries: (809) 763-1 315
For help outside of the United States and Canada, call
the following numbers as appropriate: 0 In other overseas locations, call GM Overseas
Distribution Corporation in Canada at:
0 In Mexico: (525) 625-3256 (905) 644-4 1 1 2.
0 In Puerto Rico: 1-800-496-9992 (English) or
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)

8-3
For promptassistance, please have the following Refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance
information available to give the Customer Information bookletfor addresses of
Assistance Representative: GM Overseas offices.
0 Your name, address, home and business When contacting Chevrolet,please remember that
telephone numbers your concern will likely be resolved in the dealership,
0 Vehicle Identification Number(This is available using the dealer’s facilities, equipment and personnel.
from the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plateat That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if
the top left of the instrument panel and visible you have a concern.
through the windshield.)
Customer Assistance forText
0 Dealership name andlocation
Telephone (TTY) Users
0 Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
To assist customers whoare deaf, hard of hearing, or
0 Nature of concern speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
We encourage you to call us so we can give your inquiry Chevrolet has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer
prompt attention. However, if you wish to write Assistance Center.Any TTY user can communicate with
Chevrolet, address your inquiry to: Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV. (TTY users in
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 7047
Troy, MI48007-7047
In Canada, write to:
General Motorsof Canada Limited
Customer CommunicationCentre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
8-4
Chevrolet Roadside Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year, by calling 1-800-CHEV-USA
Assistance Program (1 -800-243-8872). This toll-free number willprovide
you over-the-phone roadside assistance with minor
mechanical problems, If your problem cannot be
resolved over the phone, our advisors have access to a
nationwide network of dealer recommended service
providers. Roadside membership is free, however some
services may incur costs.
Roadside offers two levels of service to the customer,
A Basic Care and Courtesy" Care:
L Toll-freenumber,1-800-CHEV-USA
0 Free towing for warranty repairs
0 Basic over-the-phone technical advice
0 Available dealer services at reasonable costs (Le.,
wrecker services, 1ocksrnitWkey service, glass
repair, etc.)

To enhance Chevrolet's strong commitment to customer


satisfaction, Chevrolet is excited to announce the
establishment of the Chevrolet Roadside Assistance
Center, As the owner of a 1998 Chevrolet, membership
in Roadside Assistance is free.

8-5
ROADSIDE Courtesy TM Care PROVIDES: Chevrolet offers Courtesy Transportationfor customers
needing warranty service. Courtesy Transportation will
Roadside Basic Care services (as outlined previously)
Plus: be offered in conjunction with the coverage provided by
the Bumperto Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warranty
FREE Non-Warranty Towing (to the closest dealer to eligible purchasers of 1998 Chevrolet passenger car
from a legal roadway) and light duty trucks. (Please see your selling dealer
FREE LocksmiWKey Service (when keys are lost for details.)
on the road or lockedinside) Note: Courtesy Care is available to retail and retaillease
FREE Flat Tire Service (spare installed on the road) customers operating 1998 and newer Chevrolet vehicles
for a periodof 3 years/36,000 miles(60 000 km),
FREE Jump Start (at home or on the road) whichever occurs first. All Courtesy Care services must
FREE Fuel Delivery ($5 of fuel delivered on be pre-arranged by Chevrolet Roadsideor dealer
the road) Service Management.
Basic Care and Courtesy Care are not part of or
included in the coverage provided by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet reserves the rightto
modify or discontinue Basic Care and Courtesy Care
at any time.
For complete program details, see your Chevrolet dealer Please refer to the Roadside Assistance brochure
to obtain a Roadside Assistance Center brochure. inside your owner information portfolio for full
program details.
The Roadside Assistance Center uses companies that
will provide you with quality and priority service. When Canadian Roadside Assistance
roadside services are required, our advisors will explain
any payment obligations that may be incurred for Vehicles purchased inCanada have an extensive
utilizing outside services. Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the UnitedStates. Please refer to the
For prompt assistance when calling, please have the separate brochure provided by the dealer or call
following available to give to the advisor: 1-800-268-6800for emergency services.
0 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
0 License plate number
0 Vehicle color
0 Vehicle location
0 Telephone number where youcan be reached
0 Vehicle mileage
0 Description of problem

8-7
Courtesy Transportation Chevrolet Courtesy Transportation isnot part of the
Chevrolet offers Courtesy Transportation for customers Bumper to BumperNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Chevrolet reservesthe right to make any changesor
needing warranty service. Courtesy Transportation will
discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time
be offered in conjunction with the coverage providedby without notification.
the Bumper to Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warranty
to retail purchasersof 1998 Chevrolet passenger cars For additional program details, contact your
and light duty trucks (please see your selling dealer Chevrolet dealer.
for details). Some state insurance regulations make it impracticalto
Courtesy Transportation includes: rent vehicles to people under 21 years of age. If you are
under 21 and have difficulty rentinga vehicle, Chevrolet
One way shuttle ride for any warranty repair will reimburse upto $30/day for documented
completed duringthe same day. transportation you receive.
Up to $30 maximum daily vehicle rental allowance For warranty repairs duringthe Complete Vehicle
for any overnight warranty repair up to five days,OR Coverage period inthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
Up to $30 maximum daily cab, bus or other interim transportationmay be available under the
transportation allowance in lieu of rental for any Courtesy Transportation Program.Please consult your
overnight warranty repair up to five days, OR dealer for details. The Roadside Assistance program is
Up to $10 daily fuel allowance for rides provided by available only in the United States and Canada.
another person (i.e., friend, neighbor, etc.) in lieu of In Canada, please consult your GM dealer for
rental for any overnight warranty repair up to five days. information on CourtesyTransportation.
Note: All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by your Chevrolet dealer
service management. Claim amounts should
reflect all actual costs.

8-8
GM Participation in an Alternative BBB AUTO LINE is an out-of-court program
administered by the Better Business Bureau system to
Dispute Resolution Program settle automotive disputes. This program is available
This program is available in all 50 states and the District free of charge to customers who currently own or lease a
of Columbia. Canadian owners refer to your Warranty GM vehicle.
and Owner Assistance Information booklet for If you are notsatisfied after following the Customer
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Satisfaction Procedure, you may contact the BBB using
Plan (CAMVAP). General Motors reserves the right to the toll-free telephone number, or write them at the
change eligibility limitations and/or to discontinue its following address:
participation in this program.
BBB AUTO LINE
Both Chevrolet and your Chevrolet dealer are committed Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
to making sure youare completely satisfied with your new 4200 Wilson Boulevard
vehicle. Our experience has shown that, ifa situation Suite 800
arises where you feel your concern has not been Arlington, VA 22203- 1804
adequately addressed, the Customer Satisfaction Procedure
described earlier in this section is very successful. Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
There may be instances where an impartial third party To file a claim, you will be askedto provide your name
can assist in arriving at a solution to a disagreement and address, your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
regarding vehicle repairs or interpretation of the New and a statement of the nature of your complaint.
Vehicle Limited Warranty. To assist in resolving these Eligibility is limited by vehicle age and mileage, and
disagreements, Chevrolet voluntarily participates in other factors.
BBB AUTO LINE.

8-9
We prefer you utilize the Customer Satisfaction REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
Procedure before you resort to AUTO LINE,but you
may contact the BBB at any time. The BBB will attempt TO THE UNITEDSTATES
to resolve the complaint serving asan intermediary. If GOVERNMENT
this mediation is unsuccessful, an informal hearing will If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could
be scheduled whereeligible customers may presenttheir cause a crash or couldcause injury or death, you should
case to an impartial third-party arbitrator. immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
The arbitrator will make a decision which you may Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to
accept or reject. If you accept the decision, GM will be notifying General Motors.
bound by that decision.The entire dispute resolution If NHTSA receivessimilar complaints, it may open an
procedure shouldordinarily take about 40 days fromthe investigation, and if itfinds that a safety defectexists in
time you file a claim until a decision is made. a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
Some state laws may require you to use this program campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
before filing a claim with a state-run arbitration program in individual problems between you, your dealer or
or in the courts. For further information, contact the General Motors.
BBB at 1-800-955-5 100 or the Chevrolet Customer
To contact NHTSA, you mayeither call the Auto Safety
Assistance Center at 1-800-222- 1020.
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the
Warranty Information Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
that containsdetailed warranty information. Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety fromthe Hotline.

8-10
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO In Canada, please callus at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT General Motorsof Canada Limited
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify 1908 Colonel SamDrive
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Ordering Service and Owner
Transport Canada
Box 8880
Publications in Canada
Ottawa, Ontario K l G 352 Service manuals, owner’s manuals andother service
literature are available for purchase for all current and
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS past model General Motors vehicles.
TO GENERAL MOTORS The toll-free telephone number for ordering information
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in Canada is 1-800-668-5539.
in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify
us. Please call us at 1-800-222- 1020 or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 7047
Troy, MI 48007-7047
1998 CHEVROLET SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION
The following publications covering the operation and servicing
of your vehicle can be purchased by filling out
the Service Publication Order Form in this book and mailing
it in with your check, money order,
or credit card information to Helm, Incorporated (address below.)

CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR1998 CHEVROLET


SERVICE MANUALS OWNER’S INFORMATION
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information Owner publications are written directly for Owners and
on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes, intended to provide basic operational information about the
electrical, steering,body, etc. vehicle. The owner’s manual will include the Maintenance
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $90.00 Schedule forall models.
TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE, TRANSFER CASE In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual and
UNIT REPAIR MANUAL Warranty Booklet.
This manual provides information on unit repair service RETAIL SELL PRICE:$1 5.00
procedures, adjustments and specifications for the Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manualonly.
1998 GM transmissions, transaxlesand transfer cases. RETAIL SELL PRICE:$10.00
RETAIL SELL PRICE:$40.00
CURRENT & PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS
SERVICE BULLETINS Service Publications are available for current and past
Service Bulletins give technical service information neededmodel GM vehicles.To request an order form, please
to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks. specify year and model name of the vehicle.
Each bulletin contains instructions
to assist in the
diagnosis and serviceof your vehicle.

PLEASE COMPLETE THE ORDER FORM SHOWN ON OR ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356
THE FOLLOWING PAGE AND MAILTO: Monday-Friday 8:OO AM - 6:OO PM Eastern Time
Helm, Incorporated P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207 For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover)
ORDER TOLL FREE
(NOTE: For Credit Card HoldersOnly)
1-800-782-4356
Orders will be mailed within 10 days of receipt. Please allow ade uate time for postal
service. If further information is needed, write to the address s own below or call
1-800-782-4356. Material cannot be returned for credit without packing slip w
a
(Monday-Friday 8:OO AM - 6:OO PM EST) information within30 days of delivery. On returns, a re-stocking fee may be applied
FAX Orders
Only 1-313-865-5927 against
the
original
order.
PUBLICATION FORM VEHICLE MODEL TOTAL PRICE
ITEM DESCRIPTION QTYm
NUMBER NAME EACH* YE
1
Manual Service
9 Car & Light Truck
Transmission Unit Repair 1998 $40.00
9
Owner's Manual In Portfolio 1998 $15.00
8.
Owner's Manual Without Podfolio $1 1998 0.00
G
M
- TOTAL MATERIAL
1

NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, and also the
name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent. Order payable to Michigan Purchasers
S Mail completed order form to:
HELM, INCORPORATED P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207
P Helm. Inc. (USA funds
only -
do 'not send cash.)
add 6% sales tax
~ ~~ ~~ ~

$5.00
H
For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the above address for quotation.
A 0 Mastercard
U.S. Order
Processing
Canadian
Postaee

I
P
(CUSTOMERS NAME) (ATENTION)
Y
M -
0
I I
UDiscover
VISA
I
II '
See Note Beiovij

( GRANDTOTAL I I

E
mml
(STREET ADDRESS-NO P.O. BOX NUMBERS)
Number:
T N Expiration Check herefrom
ifyouryour
billing address
is different shipping
0 (CITY) (STATE) (ZIP CODE)
T
Date mo/yr: address shown.

DAYTIME TELEPHONE NO. 0


AREA CODE
L
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE

GM-CHE-ORD98 '(Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents
obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.) are to make checks payable in U.S. funds. To cover Canadian postage, add $1 1.50 plus the
US. order processing.
&I NOTES

8-14
Section 9 Index

Accessory Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58 Automatic Transmission


Adding Equipment to the Outsideof Your Vehicle . . . . . . 6-3 Check ...................................... 7-40
Adding Sound Equipment ........................ 3-28 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-15
Add-on Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 Operation ................................... 2-18
Air Bag Park Mechanism Check ........................ 7-42
Adding Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30 Shifting ..................................... 2-18
How Does it Restrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28 Starting Your Engine .......................... 2-16
How it Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26 Axle
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26 Front ....................................... 6-23
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.25.2.69 Rear ....................................... 6-21
Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
What Makes it Inflate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
What You See After it Inflates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28 Backglass Wiper. Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
When Should it Inflate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27 Battery ....................................... 6-32
Aircleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 ChargeLight ................................ 2-69
AirConditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Jump Starting ................................. 5-3
Refrigerants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65 Replacement, Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Alignment and Balance, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47 Warnings ................................ 5-3, 5-4
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55 Battery Run-Down Protection ..................... 2-44
Antenna, Fixed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 BBB Auto Line ................................. 8-9
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light. . . . . . . . . 2-72, 4-7 Better Business Bureau Mediation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Appearancecare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49 Blizzard, Driving In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57 Brake Fluid .................................... 6-29
Arbitration Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Brake, Parking ................................. 2-22
Armrest,Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53 Brake System Warning Light...................... 2-71
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57 Brakes
Audio Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 1,3- 10 Adjustment .................................. 6-32
Automatic Headlamp System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41 Anti-Lock ................................... 4-7
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29

9-1
Brakes (Continued) TopStrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-47
PedalTravel ................................. 6-32 Where Not to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-50
Replacing System Parts ........................ 6-32 Where to Put ................................ 1-46
Trailer ......................................4-46 CigaretteLighter ............................... 2-57
Wear ....................................... 6-31 Circuit Breakers and Fuses ....................... 6-59
Brake-Transmission Shift Interlock Check ........... 7-41 Cleaner. Air ................................... 6-14
Braking ........................................ 4-6 Cleaning
Braking in Emergencies ................... . . . . . . . 4-8 Aluminum Wheels ............................ 6-55
Break-In, New Vehicle .......................... 2- 13 Exterior Lamps and Lenses ..................... 6-54
Brightness Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43 Fabric ...................................... 6-50
BTSICheck ................................... 7-41 Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-53
Bulb Replacement ......................... 6-33, 6-62 Inside of Your Vehicle ......................... 6-50
InstrumentPanel ............................. 6-52
Interior Plastic Components ..................... 6-52
Canadian Roadside Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Capacities and Specifications ................. 6.64.6.65 Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-52
Outside of Your Vehicle ........................ 6-54
CarbonMonoxide ................ 2.9.2.27.4.38.4.45 Stains ...................................... 6-51
Cargocover ................................... 2-54 Tires ....................................... 6-55
Cargo Tie Downs ............................... 2-55
Center Front Passenger Position ................... 1-30 Vinyl .......................................6-51
Certificatioflire Label .......................... 4-40 Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-53
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-55
Chains Windshield, Backglass and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-46 Climate Control System ....................... 3-2, 3-3
Tire ........................................ 6-48 Clock, Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Changing a Flat Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -2 1 Clutch, Hydraulic ............................... 6-20
Charging System Light .......................... 2-69 Comfort Controls ................................ 3-1
Check 4WD Light ..............................2-77 Compact Disc Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Check Gages Light .............................. 2-77 Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Checking Your Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56
Chemical Paint Spotting.......................... 6-56 ConvenienceNet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Convex Outside Mirror .......................... 2-46
ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
Center Seat Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50 Coolant .................................. 5-14, 6-23
Coolant Heater, Engine .......................... 2-17
Securing in a Rear Outside Seat Position........... 1-48 Courtesy Transportation ........................... 8-8
Securing in the Right Front Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . 1-50 Cruise Control ................................. 2-37
9-2
Customer Assistance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Rainy Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Snowy and Icy Conditions ...................... 4-36
Through Deep StandingWater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30
WetRoads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28
Damage. Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Damage. Sheet Metal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55 With a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47
Daytime Running Lamps ......................... 2-42 Driving On Grades While Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
DeadBattery ................................... 5-3 DrunkenDriving ................................ 4-3
Defects. Reporting Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
DefensiveDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Defogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 E a s y Entry Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
Defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Electrical Equipment. Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28. 6-58
Dimensions.Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66 Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-58
DomeLamps .................................. 2-43 Endgate ....................................... 2-9
Door EmergencyRelease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 ManualRelease .............................. 2-10
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52 Remote Release .............................. 2-11
Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Engine ........................................ 6-9
Drive. Automatic Transmission .................... 2-20 Coolant Heater ............................... 2-17
Drive Axle Service .............................. 7-44 Coolant Level Check .......................... 7-39
Driver Information System ....................... 2-50 Coolant Temperature Gage ..................... 2-72
DriverPosition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15 Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Driving FanNoise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
City . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 OilLevelCheck .............................. 7-39
Drunken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Running While Parked ......................... 2-28
Freeway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-64
Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 14 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34 Engine Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
InaBlizzard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38 Engine Coolant ................................. 6-23
Night ...................................... 4-27 Engineoil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Off-Road ................................... 4-14 Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
On Curves ................................... 4-9 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

9-3
Engine Oil (Continued) Front Storage Area .............................. 2-53
Checking ................................... 6-1 1 Front Towing .................................. 5-10
KindtoUse ................................. 6-12 Front Turn Signal Lamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Pressure Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75 Fuel .......................................... 6-3
Used ....................................... 6-14 Filling a Portable Container. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
When to Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 13 Filling Your Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Exhaust. Engine ................................ 2-27 Foreign Countries .............................. 6-5
ExitLighting ..................................2-43 Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
Express-Down Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 Fuse Block
Engine Compartment .......................... 6-62
InstrumentPanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
Fabric Cleaning ............................... 6-50 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 6-59
Fifth Gear. Manual Transmission ................... 2-21
Filling a Portable Fuel Container. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Filling Your Tank ................................ 6-5 Gages
Filter Engine Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-75
Remote Oil .................................. 6-14 Fuel ....................................... 2-78
Finishcare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54 Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.47.2.60
Finish Damage ................................. 6-56 GasCap ....................................... 6-5
First Gear Gate Ajar Light ................................ 2-77
AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 GAWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40
Manual Transmission .......................... 2-2 1 GearPositions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Flashers. Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 GloveBox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Flat Tire. Changing ............................. 5-21 Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Fluids and Lubricants ....................... 6-65. 7-45 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40..
FogLampSwitch ............................... Franqais 2-42 Guide en . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Foreign Countries. Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 GVWR ....................................... 4-40
Fourth Gear. Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Four-wheel Drive ......................... 2-29. 6-22..
FrenchLanguage Manual ........................... 11
Halogen Bulbs ................................ 6-33
FrontAxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Front Map Lamps............................... 2-43 HeadRestraints ................................. 1-7
Front Reading Lamps ....................... 2-43. 2-47 Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40

9-4
Bulb Replacement ............................ 6-34 InstrumentPanel ............................... 2-64
HighLow Beam Changer ...................... 2-35 Cleaning .................................... 6-52
OnReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41 Cluster ................................ 2.65.2.66
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59 Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
Hearing Impaired. Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Interior Lamps ................................. 2-43
Heated Front Seats ............................... 1-5
Heated Outside Mirrors .......................... 2-46 Jacking Equipment ............................. 5-22
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7 Jump Starting ................................... 5-3
Highway Hypnosis .............................. 4-34
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34 K e y in the Ignition ............................. 2-12
Hitches. Trailer ................................. 4-45 Key Lock Cylinders Service ...................... 7-40
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Key Release Button ............................. 2-15
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Hydraulic Clutch ............................... 6-20 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Check ...................................... 7-40
Hydroplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 Labels
Certificatioflire ............................. 4-40
Ignition Fuse .................................. 6.60.6.62
Positions .................................... 2-14 Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57
Transmission Lock Check ...................... 7-42 Service Parts Identification ..................... 6-58
Ignition Transmission Lock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42 Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
Illuminated Entry ............................... 2-43 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Inflation. Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.41.7.39 Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Inside Daymight Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44 FrontMap ................................... 2-43
Inspections Front Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.43.2.47
Brakesystem ................................ 7-44 Interior ..................................... 2-43
Engine Cooling System ........................ 7-43 OnReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
ExhaustSystems ............................. 7-43 Latches. Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Front Drive Axle Boot Seal ..................... 7-43 Leaving Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Steering .................................... 7-43 Leaving Your Vehicle with the Engine Running . . . . . . . 2-25
Suspension .................................. 7-43 Lighter ....................................... 2-57
Throttle System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43 Lights
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44 Air Bag Readiness ....................... 1.25. 2.69
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.72.4.7
Lights (Continued) Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71 Scheduled Maintenance Services.................. 7-4
Charging System .............................2-69 Short TripKity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.57. .7
Check4WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-77 Maintenance. Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
CheckGages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-77 Maintenance When Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-50
GateAjar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77 Malfunction Indicator Lamp ...................... 2-73
LowFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78 Manual Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Safety Belt Reminder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 10. 2.68 - Manual Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Security Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76 Manual Transmission
Service Engine Soon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Shift .................................. 2-22. 2.70 Fluid ....................................... 6-19
Loading YourVehicle ........................... 4-40 Operation ................................... 2-21
Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29 Shifting ..................................... 2-21
LockoutPrevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Starting Your Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
LockoutSwitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Locks Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Convex Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Ignition Transmission Check .................... 7-42 Heated Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Key Lock Cylinder Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40 Illuminated Visor Vanity ....................... 2-58
PowerDoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 5 Inside Daymight Rearview ..................... 2-44
Rear Door Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 13 Visorvanity ................................. 2-58
LowFuelLight ................................ 2-78 ModelReference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi
Lubricants and Fluids....................... 6-65, 7-45 MountainRoads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Lubrication Service, Body ........................ 7-40 Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Luggagecarrier ................................ 2-55
LumbarControls ............................ 1-3, 1-4
N e t , Convenience .............................. 2-54
Neutral
Maintenance Record ........................... 7-48 AutomaticTransmission ....................... 2-19
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Long Tripmighway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6, 7-27 New Vehicle “Break-In” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Owner Checks and Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39 Nightvision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27
Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
9-6
Odometer .................................... 2-67 Power
Off-Road Driving .............................. 4- 14 AccessoryOutlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Off-Road Recovery ............................. 4- 11 Door Locks ................................... 2-5
Oil. Engine .................................... 6-10 Remote Control Mirror ........................ 2-45
Opener. Garage Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.47.2.60 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Ordering Owner and Service Publications. . . . . . . 8- 11. 8. 12 Steering Fluid ................................ 6-27
Outside Mirror Windows ................................... 2-31
ManualAdjust ............................... 2-45 Power Seat ..................................... 1-3
Power Remote Control ......................... 2-45 LumbarControls .............................. 1-4
Convex ..................................... 2-46 Pregnancy. Use of Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
OverheadConsole .............................. 2-46 Problems on the Road ............................ 5-1
Overheating Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5- 12 Publications. Service and Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 11. 8- 12
Owner Checks and Services....................... 7-39
Owner Publications ........................ 8- 11. 8- 12
Radiator. Adding Coolant ....................... 5-17
Radiator Pressure Cap ........................... 6-26
P a i n t Spotting. Chemical ........................ 6-56 Radio Reception ................................ 3-28
Park Radios
Automatic Transmission ....................... 2- 18 AM-€34 Stereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Cassette Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 12. 3. 15
Shifting Out of ............................... 2-26 Cassette Tape Player Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.29.7.39
Parking Compact Disc Player .......................... 3-20
AtNight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Compact Disc Player Care ...................... 3-30
Brake ...................................... 2-22 Remote Cassette Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Brake Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42 Setting the Clock ............................. 3-10
Lots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Theft-Deterrent Feature ........................ 3-26
On Hills with a Trailer ......................... 4-49 Rain. Driving .................................. 4-28
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 RAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Your Vehicle. Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 Rear
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 Axle ....................................... 6-21
Passlock" .................................... 2-12 Door Security Locks ........................... 2-5
Payload ....................................... 4-42 Safety Belt Comfort Guides ..................... 1-35
Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-43 SeatPassengers .............................. 1-32
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

9-7
Rear (Continued) Care ....................................... 6-52
Towing ..................................... 5- 11 Center Front Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
WindowDefogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9 Center Rear Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
Window Washerwiper ........................ 2-37 Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39.1-53
Rearseats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 DriverPosition ............................... 1-15
Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44 Extender .................................... 1-56
Reclining Front Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5 How to Wear Properly ......................... 1-15
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . 6-65. 7-45 LapBelt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-30.1-38
RecoveryHooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36 Lap-Shoulder ........................... 1-15.1-32
Recovery Tank. Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 14 Questions andAnswers ........................ 1-14
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 4-39 Rear Comfort Guides .......................... 1-35
Replacement Rear Seat Passengers .......................... 1-32
Bulbs ...................................... 6-64 Replacing After a Crash........................ 1-57
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-65 Right Front Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Wheel ...................................... 6-45 Use During Pregnancy ......................... 1-22
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 WhyTheyWork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Restraints Safety Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-46
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40 Safety Defects. Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56 Safety Warnings and Symbols ....................... iii
Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42 Scheduled Maintenance Services.................... 7-4
Head ........................................ 1-7 Seatback
Replacing Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-57 Latches ...................................... 1-7
Retained Accessory Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 16 RecliningFront ............................... 1-5
Reverse Seats and Restraint Systems ........................ 1-1
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 19 Second Gear
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 AutomaticTransmission ....................... 2-20
Right Front Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 ManualTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Roadside Assistance .............................. 8-5 Security Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
Canadian .................................... 8-7 Service and Appearance Care ...................... 6-1
Rocking YourVehicle ........................... 5-36 Service and Owner Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 11. 8- 12
Rotation. Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42 Service Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Service Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
safety Belts .................................. 1- 10 Service Work. Doing Your Own . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Adults ...................................... 1-15 Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
9-8
Sheet Metal Damage ............................ 6-55 Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Shift Light ............................... 2.22.2.70 THEFTLOCK ............................... 3-26
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 18. 2.21 Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
IntoPark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Third. Automatic Transmission .................... 2-20
Out of Park .................................. 2-26 Third Gear. Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
SignalingTurns ................................ 2-34 Tilt Steering Wheel ............................. 2-33
SIR .......................................... 1-23 Time.Setting .................................. 3-10
Skidding ...................................... 4-13 Tire Chains .................................... 6-48
Specifications and Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.64.6.65 Tire Inflation Check ............................. 7-39
Speech Impaired. Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Tires
Speedometer ................................... 2-67 Alignment and Balance ........................ 6-47
Stains. Cleaning ................................ 6-5 1 Buying New ................................. 6-44
Starter Switch Check ............................ 7-41 Changing a Flat .............................. 5-21
Starting Your Engine ............................ 2- 16 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Steam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Inflation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41.7-39
Steering Inspection and Rotation ........................ 6-42
In Emergencies ............................... 4- 10 Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
Power ....................................... 4-9 Temperature ................................. 6-46
Steering Wheel. Tilt ............................. 2-33 Traction .................................... 6-46
Storage Compartments ........................... 2-46 Treadwear ................................... 6-46
Storage. Vehicle ................................ 6-33 Uniform Quality Grading ....................... 6-45
Storing a Flator Spare Tire and Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30 WearIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Stuck: In Sand. Mud. Ice or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35 When It’s Time for New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
SunVisors .................................... 2-57 TopStrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52 TorqueLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59 Torque. Wheel Nut ......................... 5-30. 6-64
Supplemental Inflatable Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Symbols. Vehicle .................................. v Towing.RecreationalVehicle ..................... 4-39
Towing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Trailer
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-46
Taillamp Bulb Replacement ....................... 6-38 Driving on Grades ............................ 4-48
TapePlayerCare ............................... 3-29 Driving with a Trailer.......................... 4-47
Temperature and Compass Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 Hitches ..................................... 4-45
9-9
Trailer (Continued) Vehicle Dimensions ............................. 6-66
Maintenance When Towing ..................... 4-50 Vehicle Identification Number ..................... 6-58
Parking on Hills .............................. 4-49 Vehicle Loading ................................ 4-40
Safety Chains ................................ 4-46 VehicleStorage ................................ 6-33
Tongueweight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44 Ventilation System ............................... 3-7
Total Weight on Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45 Visors. Sun .................................... 2-57
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 Voltmeter ..................................... 2-70
Turnsignals ................................. 4-48
Weight ..................................... 4-44
WiringHarness ............................... 4-50 w a r n i n g Devices ........................... 5.2.5.3
Transfer Case ............................. 2-29, 6-22 Warning Lights. Gages and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
Transmission Fluid Washer Fluid. Windshield ........................ 6-28
Automatic ................................... 6- 15 Washing Your Vehicle ........................... 6-54
Manual ..................................... 6-19 Weatherstrips .................................. 6-53
Transmitters, Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Wheel Alignment ............................... 6-47
Transportation,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Wheel Nut Torque ......................... 5.30.6.64
Trip, Before Leaving ............................ 4-33 Wheel Replacement ............................. 6-47
TripOdometer ................................. 2-67 Windows
TTYUsers ..................................... 8-4 Express-Down ............................... 2-32
Turn Signal and Lane Change Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 LockoutSwitch .............................. 2-32
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48 Manual ..................................... 2-31
Power ...................................... 2-31
Swing-Out .................................. 2-33
Underbody Maintenance ........................ 6-56 WindshieldWasher ............................. 2-36
Universal Transmitter............................ 2-60 Fluid ....................................... 6-28
Accessories ................................. 2-63 FluidLevelCheck ............................ 7-39
Erasing Channels ............................. 2-63 WindshieldWiper .............................. 2-36
Operation ................................... 2-62 Bladecheck ................................. 7-40
Programming ................................ 2-61 BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Rolling Code Openers ......................... 2-62 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
Used Replacement Wheels........................ 6-48 Rear ....................................... 2-37
Winter Driving ................................. 4-36
Vehicle control ............................... -4-5 Wiring,Headlamp .............................. 6-59
Vehicle Damage Warnings .......................... iv WreckerTowing ................................. 5-7
. .>

3057

Você também pode gostar